1gm(1)                       General Commands Manual                      gm(1)
2
3
4
5       NAME
6
7              gm  - command-line utility to create, edit, compare, convert, or
8              display images
9
10

SYNOPSIS

12       gm animate [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ]
13
14       gm batch [ options ... ] [ script ]
15
16       gm benchmark [ options ... ] subcommand
17
18       gm compare [ options ... ] reference-image [  options  ...  ]  compare-
19       image [ options ... ]
20
21       gm  composite  [  options  ... ] change-image base-image [ mask-image ]
22       output-image
23
24       gm conjure [ options ] script.msl [ [ options ] script.msl ]
25
26       gm convert [ [ options ... ] [ input-file ...  ] [ options ... ] ] out‐
27       put-file
28
29       gm display [ options ... ] file ...  [ [options ... ]file ... ]
30
31       gm identify file [ file ... ]
32
33       gm import [ options ... ] file
34
35       gm mogrify [ options ... ] file ...
36
37       gm  montage  [  options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ] output-
38       file
39
40       gm time subcommand
41
42       gm version
43

DESCRIPTION

45        GraphicsMagick's gm provides a suite of utilities for  creating,  com‐
46       paring,  converting, editing, and displaying images.  All of the utili‐
47       ties are provided as sub-commands of a single gm executable:
48
49       animate displays an animation (e.g. a GIF file) on any workstation dis‐
50       play running an X server.
51
52       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
53       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
54       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
55       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
56
57       benchmark executes one of the other utility commands (e.g. convert) for
58       a specified number of iterations, or execution time, and reports execu‐
59       tion time and other profiling  information  such  as  CPU  utilization.
60       Benchmark provides various operating modes including executing the com‐
61       mand with a varying number of threads, and alternate reporting  formats
62       such as comma-separated value (CSV).
63
64       compare compares two images and reports difference statistics according
65       to specified metrics and/or outputs an image with a visual  representa‐
66       tion  of  the  differences.   It may also be used to test if images are
67       similar within a particular range and  specified  metric,  returning  a
68       truth value to the executing environment.
69
70       composite  composites images (blends or merges images together) to cre‐
71       ate new images.
72
73       conjure interprets and executes scripts in the  Magick  Scripting  Lan‐
74       guage (MSL).
75
76       convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
77       with the same or differing image format  while  applying  an  arbitrary
78       number of image transformations.
79
80       display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
81       play facility. It can display an image on any workstation display  run‐
82       ning an X server.
83
84       identify  describes the format and characteristics of one or more image
85       files. It will also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.
86
87       import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
88       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
89       screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen.
90
91       mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
92       include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others. The
93       transmogrified image overwrites the original image.
94
95       montage creates a composite by combining several separate  images.  The
96       images  are  tiled  on  the  composite image with the name of the image
97       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
98
99       time executes a subcommand and reports the user, system, and total exe‐
100       cution time consumed.
101
102       version  reports  the  GraphicsMagick  release version, maximum sample-
103       depth, copyright notice, supported features, and the options used while
104       building the software.
105
106       The GraphicsMagick utilities recognize the following image formats:
107
108
109       Name  Mode Description
110        o  3FR       r-- Hasselblad Photo RAW
111        o  8BIM      rw- Photoshop resource format
112        o  8BIMTEXT  rw- Photoshop resource text format
113        o  8BIMWTEXT rw- Photoshop resource wide text format
114        o  APP1      rw- Raw application information
115        o  APP1JPEG  rw- Raw JPEG binary data
116        o  ART       r-- PF1: 1st Publisher
117        o  ARW       r-- Sony Alpha DSLR RAW
118        o  AVS       rw+ AVS X image
119        o  BIE       rw- Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
120                         interchange format
121        o  BMP       rw+ Microsoft Windows bitmap image
122        o  BMP2      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v2
123        o  BMP3      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v3
124        o  CACHE     --- Magick Persistent Cache image format
125        o  CALS      rw- Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle
126                         Support Type 1 image
127        o  CAPTION   r-- Caption (requires separate size info)
128        o  CIN       rw- Kodak Cineon Format
129        o  CMYK      rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
130                         samples (8 or 16 bits, depending on
131                         the image depth)
132        o  CMYKA     rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
133                         matte samples (8 or 16 bits, depending
134                         on the image depth)
135        o  CR2       r-- Canon Photo RAW
136        o  CRW       r-- Canon Photo RAW
137        o  CUR       r-- Microsoft Cursor Icon
138        o  CUT       r-- DR Halo
139        o  DCM       r-- Digital Imaging and Communications in
140                         Medicine image
141        o  DCR       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
142        o  DCX       rw+ ZSoft IBM PC multi-page Paintbrush
143        o  DNG       r-- Adobe Digital Negative
144        o  DPS       r-- Display PostScript Interpreter
145        o  DPX       rw- Digital Moving Picture Exchange
146        o  EPDF      rw- Encapsulated Portable Document Format
147        o  EPI       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
148                         Interchange format
149        o  EPS       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
150        o  EPS2      -w- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
151        o  EPS3      -w- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
152        o  EPSF      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
153        o  EPSI      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
154                         Interchange format
155        o  EPT       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript with MS-DOS
156                         TIFF preview
157        o  EPT2      rw- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
158                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
159        o  EPT3      rw- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
160                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
161        o  EXIF      rw- Exif digital camera binary data
162        o  FAX       rw+ Group 3 FAX (Not TIFF Group3 FAX!)
163        o  FITS      rw- Flexible Image Transport System
164        o  FRACTAL   r-- Plasma fractal image
165        o  FPX       rw- FlashPix Format
166        o  GIF       rw+ CompuServe graphics interchange format
167        o  GIF87     rw- CompuServe graphics interchange format
168                         (version 87a)
169        o  GRADIENT  r-- Gradual passing from one shade to
170                         another
171        o  GRAY      rw+ Raw gray samples (8/16/32 bits,
172                         depending on the image depth)
173        o  HISTOGRAM -w- Histogram of the image
174        o  HRZ       r-- HRZ: Slow scan TV
175        o  HTML      -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
176                         client-side image map
177        o  ICB       rw+ Truevision Targa image
178        o  ICC       rw- ICC Color Profile
179        o  ICM       rw- ICC Color Profile
180        o  ICO       r-- Microsoft icon
181        o  ICON      r-- Microsoft icon
182        o  IDENTITY  r-- Hald CLUT identity image
183        o  IMAGE     r-- GraphicsMagick Embedded Image
184        o  INFO      -w+ Image descriptive information and
185                          statistics
186        o  IPTC      rw- IPTC Newsphoto
187        o  IPTCTEXT  rw- IPTC Newsphoto text format
188        o  IPTCWTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto wide text format
189        o  JBG       rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
190                         interchange format
191        o  JBIG      rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
192                         interchange format
193        o  JNG       rw- JPEG Network Graphics
194        o  JP2       rw- JPEG-2000 JP2 File Format Syntax
195        o  JPC       rw- JPEG-2000 Code Stream Syntax
196        o  JPEG      rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
197                         JFIF format
198        o  JPG       rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
199                         JFIF format
200        o  K25       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
201        o  KDC       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
202        o  LABEL     r-- Text image format
203        o  M2V       rw+ MPEG-2 Video Stream
204        o  MAP       rw- Colormap intensities and indices
205        o  MAT       r-- MATLAB image format
206        o  MATTE     -w+ MATTE format
207        o  MIFF      rw+ Magick Image File Format
208        o  MNG       rw+ Multiple-image Network Graphics
209        o  MONO      rw- Bi-level bitmap in least-significant-
210                         -byte-first order
211        o  MPC       rw+ Magick Persistent Cache image format
212        o  MPEG      rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
213        o  MPG       rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
214        o  MRW       r-- Minolta Photo Raw
215        o  MSL       r-- Magick Scripting Language
216        o  MTV       rw+ MTV Raytracing image format
217        o  MVG       rw- Magick Vector Graphics
218        o  NEF       r-- Nikon Electronic Format
219        o  NULL      r-- Constant image of uniform color
220        o  OTB       rw- On-the-air bitmap
221        o  P7        rw+ Xv thumbnail format
222        o  PAL       rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
223        o  PALM      rw- Palm Pixmap
224        o  PBM       rw+ Portable bitmap format (black and white)
225        o  PCD       rw- Photo CD
226        o  PCDS      rw- Photo CD
227        o  PCL       -w- Page Control Language
228        o  PCT       rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
229        o  PCX       rw- ZSoft IBM PC Paintbrush
230        o  PDB       rw+ Palm Database ImageViewer Format
231        o  PDF       rw+ Portable Document Format
232        o  PEF       r-- Pentax Electronic File
233        o  PFA       r-- TrueType font
234        o  PFB       r-- TrueType font
235        o  PGM       rw+ Portable graymap format (gray scale)
236        o  PGX       r-- JPEG-2000 VM Format
237        o  PICON     rw- Personal Icon
238        o  PICT      rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
239        o  PIX       r-- Alias/Wavefront RLE image format
240        o  PLASMA    r-- Plasma fractal image
241        o  PNG       rw- Portable Network Graphics
242        o  PNG24     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 24 bit RGB
243                         opaque only
244        o  PNG32     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 32 bit RGBA
245                         semitransparency OK
246        o  PNG8      rw- Portable Network Graphics, 8-bit
247                         indexed, binary transparency only
248        o  PNM       rw+ Portable anymap
249        o  PPM       rw+ Portable pixmap format (color)
250        o  PREVIEW   -w- Show a preview an image enhancement,
251                         effect, or f/x
252        o  PS        rw+ Adobe PostScript
253        o  PS2       -w+ Adobe Level II PostScript
254        o  PS3       -w+ Adobe Level III PostScript
255        o  PSD       rw- Adobe Photoshop bitmap
256        o  PTIF      rw- Pyramid encoded TIFF
257        o  PWP       r-- Seattle Film Works
258        o  RAF       r-- Fuji Photo RAW
259        o  RAS       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
260        o  RGB       rw+ Raw red, green, and blue samples
261        o  RGBA      rw+ Raw red, green, blue, and matte samples
262        o  RLA       r-- Alias/Wavefront image
263        o  RLE       r-- Utah Run length encoded image
264        o  SCT       r-- Scitex HandShake
265        o  SFW       r-- Seattle Film Works
266        o  SGI       rw+ Irix RGB image
267        o  SHTML     -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
268                         client-side image map
269        o  STEGANO   r-- Steganographic image
270        o  SUN       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
271        o  SVG       rw+ Scalable Vector Gaphics
272        o  TEXT      rw+ Raw text
273        o  TGA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
274        o  TIFF      rw+ Tagged Image File Format
275        o  TILE      r-- Tile image with a texture
276        o  TIM       r-- PSX TIM
277        o  TOPOL     r-- TOPOL X Image
278        o  TTF       r-- TrueType font
279        o  TXT       rw+ Raw text
280        o  UIL       -w- X-Motif UIL table
281        o  UYVY      rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
282        o  VDA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
283        o  VICAR     rw- VICAR rasterfile format
284        o  VID       rw+ Visual Image Directory
285        o  VIFF      rw+ Khoros Visualization image
286        o  VST       rw+ Truevision Targa image
287        o  WBMP      rw- Wireless Bitmap (level 0) image
288        o  WMF       r-- Windows Metafile
289        o  WPG       r-- Word Perfect Graphics
290        o  X         rw- X Image
291        o  X3F       r-- Foveon X3 (Sigma/Polaroid) RAW
292        o  XBM       rw- X Windows system bitmap (black
293                         and white)
294        o  XC        r-- Constant image uniform color
295        o  XCF       r-- GIMP image
296        o  XMP       rw- Adobe XML metadata
297        o  XPM       rw- X Windows system pixmap (color)
298        o  XV        rw+ Khoros Visualization image
299        o  XWD       rw- X Windows system window dump (color)
300        o  YUV       rw- CCIR 601 4:1:1 or 4:2:2 (8-bit only)
301
302           Modes:
303                     r   Read
304                     w   Write
305                     +   Multi-image
306
307
308       Support  for  some  of  these  formats  require  additional programs or
309       libraries.  See README in the source package for where to find optional
310       additional software.
311
312       Note,  a  format delineated with + means that if more than one image is
313       specified, frames are combined into  a  single  multi-image  file.  Use
314       +adjoin if you want a single image produced for each frame.
315
316       Your installation might not support all of the formats in the list.  To
317       get an accurate listing of the formats  supported  by  your  particular
318       configuration, run "gm convert -list format".
319
320       Raw  images  are  expected to have one byte per pixel unless gm is com‐
321       piled in 16-bit quantum mode or in 32-bit quantum mode. Here,  the  raw
322       data  is  expected  to  be  stored two or four bytes per pixel, respec‐
323       tively, in most-significant-byte-first order.   For  example,  you  can
324       tell  if  gm was compiled in 16-bit mode by typing "gm version" without
325       any options, and looking for "Q:16" in the first line of output.
326

FILES AND FORMATS

328       By default, the image format is determined by its magic  number,  i.e.,
329       the  first few bytes of the file. To specify a particular image format,
330       precede  the  filename  with  an  image  format  name   and   a   colon
331       (i.e.ps:image)  or  specify  the  image  type  as  the  filename suffix
332       (i.e.image.ps).  The magic number takes precedence  over  the  filename
333       suffix  and  the  prefix takes precedence over the magic number and the
334       suffix in input files.  When a file is read, its magic number is stored
335       in  the  "image->magick"  string.   In  output  files, the prefix takes
336       precedence over the filename suffix,  and  the  filename  suffix  takes
337       precedence over the "image->magick" string.
338
339       To read the "built-in" formats (GRANITE, H, LOGO, NETSCAPE, PLASMA, and
340       ROSE) use a prefix (including the colon) without a filename or  suffix.
341       To read the XC format, follow the colon with a color specification.  To
342       read the CAPTION format, follow the colon with a text string or with  a
343       filename prefixed with the at symbol (@).
344
345
346       When  you  specify X as your image type, the filename has special mean‐
347       ing. It specifies an X window by id, name, or root. If no  filename  is
348       specified,  the window is selected by clicking the mouse in the desired
349       window.
350
351       Specify input_file as - for standard input, output_file as - for  stan‐
352       dard  output.   If  input_file has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is
353       uncompressed with uncompress or gunzip  respectively.   If  output_file
354       has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is compressed using with compress
355       or gzip respectively.
356
357       Use an optional index enclosed in brackets after an input file name  to
358       specify  a  desired  subimage  of  a multi-resolution image format like
359       Photo CD (e.g. "img0001.pcd[4]") or  a  range  for  MPEG  images  (e.g.
360       "video.mpg[50-75]").  A  subimage  specification  can be disjoint (e.g.
361       "image.tiff[2,7,4]"). For raw images, specify a subimage with a  geome‐
362       try  (e.g.  -size  640x512  "image.rgb[320x256+50+50]").   Surround the
363       image name with quotation marks to prevent your shell from interpreting
364       the  square  brackets.  Single images are written with the filename you
365       specify. However, multi-part images (e.g., a multi-page PostScript doc‐
366       ument  with  +adjoin  specified)  may  be written with the scene number
367       included as part of the filename. In order to include the scene  number
368       in  the  filename,  it is necessary to include a printf-style %d format
369       specification in the file name and use the +adjoin option. For example,
370
371           image%02d.miff
372
373
374       writes files image00.miff, image01.miff, etc. Only a single  specifica‐
375       tion  is allowed within an output filename. If more than one specifica‐
376       tion is present, it will be ignored. It is best to embed the scene num‐
377       ber  in  the  base part of the file name, not in the extension, because
378       the extension will not be a recognizeable image type.
379
380       When running a commandline utility, you can prepend an at sign @  to  a
381       filename to read a list of image filenames from that file. This is con‐
382       venient in the event you have too many image filenames to  fit  on  the
383       command line.
384

OPTIONS

386       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
387       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
388       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
389       Some options only affect the decoding of images  and  others  only  the
390       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
391
392       This  is a combined list of the command-line options used by the Graph‐
393       icsMagick utilities (animate,  compare,  composite,  convert,  display,
394       identify, import, mogrify and montage).
395
396
397       In  this  document,  angle  brackets ("<>") enclose variables and curly
398       brackets ("{}") enclose optional parameters. For example, "-fuzz  <dis‐
399       tance>{%}" means you can use the option "-fuzz 10" or "-fuzz 2%".
400
401
402       -adjoin
403              join images into a single multi-image file
404
405              By  default,  all  images of an image sequence are stored in the
406              same file. However, some formats  (e.g.  JPEG)  do  not  support
407              storing more than one image per file and only the first frame in
408              an image sequence will be saved unless the result  is  saved  to
409              separate  files.  Use +adjoin to force saving multiple frames to
410              multiple numbered files. If +adjoin is  used,  then  the  output
411              filename  must  include  a printf style formatting specification
412              for the numeric part of the filename.  For example,
413
414                  image%02d.miff
415
416
417       -affine <matrix>
418              drawing transform matrix
419
420              This option provides a transform matrix {sx,rx,ry,sy,tx,ty}  for
421              use by subsequent -draw or -transform options.
422
423       -antialias
424              remove pixel aliasing
425
426              By default antialiasing algorithms are used when drawing objects
427              (e.g. lines) or rendering vector formats  (e.g.  WMF  and  Post‐
428              script).  Use  +antialias  to  disable use of antialiasing algo‐
429              rithms.  Reasons  to  disable  antialiasing   include   avoiding
430              increasing colors in the image, or improving rendering speed.
431
432       -append
433              append a set of images
434
435              This option creates a single image where the images in the orig‐
436              inal set are stacked top-to-bottom.  If they are not of the same
437              width, any narrow images will be expanded to fit using the back‐
438              ground color.  Use +append to stack images  left-to-right.   The
439              set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.  If
440              the -append option appears after all of the  input  images,  all
441              images are appended.
442
443        -asc-cdl <spec>
444              apply ASC CDL color transform
445
446              Applies  ("bakes  in")  the  ASC  CDL, which is a format for the
447              exchange of basic  primary  color  grading  information  between
448              equipment  and software from different manufacturers. The format
449              defines the math for three functions: slope, offset  and  power.
450              Each  function  uses a number for the red, green, and blue color
451              channels for a total of nine numbers comprising a  single  color
452              decision. The tenth number (optional) is for chromiance (satura‐
453              tion) as specified by ASC CDL 1.2.
454
455              The argument string is comma delimited and is in  the  following
456              form (but without invervening spaces or line breaks)
457
458                  redslope,redoffset,redpower:
459                  greenslope,greenoffset,greenpower:
460                  blueslope,blueoffset,bluepower:
461                  saturation
462
463
464              with the unity (no change) specification being:
465
466                  "1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0"
467
468
469       -authenticate <string>
470              decrypt image with this password
471
472              Use  this option to supply a password for decrypting an image or
473              an image sequence, if it is being read from a format such as PDF
474              that  supports  encryption.   Encrypting images being written is
475              not supported.
476
477       -auto-orient
478              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
479
480              Adjusts the image orienation so that it is suitable for viewing.
481              Uses the orientation tag obtained from the image file or as sup‐
482              plied by the -orient option.
483
484       -average
485              average a set of images
486
487              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
488              If  the  -average  option appears after all of the input images,
489              all images are averaged.
490
491       -backdrop
492              display the image centered on a backdrop.
493
494              This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is useful
495              for  hiding other X window activity while viewing the image. The
496              color of the backdrop is specified as the foreground color  (X11
497              default is black).  Refer to "X Resources", below, for details.
498
499       -background <color>
500              the background color
501
502              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
503              -fill option.
504
505       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
506              pixels below the threshold become black
507
508              Use -black-threshold to set pixels with values below the  speci‐
509              fied  threshold  to  minimum value (black). If only one value is
510              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
511              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
512              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
513              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
514              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
515              a  channel  later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%) symbol is
516              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
517              range.
518
519       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
520              blue chromaticity primary point
521
522       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
523              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
524
525              Blur with the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
526
527       -border <width>x<height>
528              surround the image with a border of color
529
530              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
531
532       -bordercolor <color>
533              the border color
534
535              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
536              -fill option.
537
538       -borderwidth <geometry>
539              the border width
540
541       -box <color>
542              set the color of the annotation bounding box
543
544              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
545              -fill option.
546
547              See -draw for further details.
548
549       -channel <type>
550              the type of channel
551
552              Choose  from:  Red,  Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan, Magenta,
553              Yellow, Black, or Gray.
554
555              Use this option to extract a particular channel from the  image.
556              Opacity,  for example, is useful for extracting the opacity val‐
557              ues from an image.
558
559       -charcoal <factor>
560              simulate a charcoal drawing
561
562       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
563              remove pixels from the interior of an image
564
565              Width and height give the number of columns and rows to  remove,
566              and  x  and y are offsets that give the location of the leftmost
567              column and topmost row to remove.
568
569              The x offset normally specifies the leftmost column  to  remove.
570              If  the  -gravity  option  is  present  with NorthEast, East, or
571              SouthEast gravity, it gives the distance leftward from the right
572              edge of the image to the rightmost column to remove.  Similarly,
573              the y offset normally specifies the topmost row to  remove,  but
574              if  the  -gravity  option  is  present with SouthWest, South, or
575              SouthEast gravity, it specifies the  distance  upward  from  the
576              bottom edge of the image to the bottom row to remove.
577
578              The  -chop option removes entire rows and columns, and moves the
579              remaining corner blocks leftward and upward to close the gaps.
580
581       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
582
583              If a clipping path is present, it will be applied to  subsequent
584              operations.
585
586              For example, if you type the following command:
587
588                  gm convert -clip -negate cockatoo.tif negated.tif
589
590
591              only the pixels within the clipping path are negated.
592
593              The  -clip feature requires the XML library.  If the XML library
594              is not present, the option is ignored.
595
596       -coalesce
597              merge a sequence of images
598
599              Each image N in the sequence after Image 0 is replaced with  the
600              image created by flattening images 0 through N.
601
602              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
603              If the -coalesce option appears after all of the  input  images,
604              all images are coalesced.
605
606       -colorize <value>
607              colorize the image with the pen color
608
609              Specify  the  amount  of  colorization  as a percentage. You can
610              apply separate colorization values to the red, green,  and  blue
611              channels  of  the image with a colorization value list delimited
612              with slashes (e.g. 0/0/50).
613
614              The -colorize option may be used in conjunction  with  -modulate
615              to produce a nice sepia toned image like:
616
617                  gm convert input.ppm -modulate 115,0,100 \
618                            -colorize 7,21,50 output.ppm.
619
620
621       -colormap <type>
622              define the colormap type
623
624              Choose between shared or private.
625
626              This  option  only  applies  when the default X server visual is
627              PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more details.  By
628              default, a shared colormap is allocated. The image shares colors
629              with other X clients.  Some image colors could be  approximated,
630              therefore  your  image  may  look  very different than intended.
631              Choose Private and the image colors appear exactly as  they  are
632              defined.  However,  other  clients  may  go technicolor when the
633              image colormap is installed.
634
635       -colors <value>
636              preferred number of colors in the image
637
638              The actual number of colors in the image may be less  than  your
639              request, but never more. Note, this is a color reduction option.
640              Images with less unique colors than specified with  this  option
641              will  have  any duplicate or unused colors removed. The ordering
642              of an existing color palette may be altered. When converting  an
643              image  from  color  to  grayscale, convert the image to the gray
644              colorspace before reducing the number of colors since  doing  so
645              is most efficient. Refer to <a href="quantize.html">quantize for
646              more details.
647
648              Note, options -dither, -colorspace, and  -treedepth  affect  the
649              color reduction algorithm.
650
651       -colorspace <value>
652              the type of colorspace
653
654              Choices  are:  CineonLog,  CMYK,  GRAY,  HSL,  HWB,  OHTA,  RGB,
655              Rec601Luma, Rec709Luma, Rec601YCbCr,  Rec709YCbCr,  Transparent,
656              XYZ, YCbCr, YIQ, YPbPr, or YUV.
657
658              Color reduction, by default, takes place in the RGB color space.
659              Empirical evidence suggests that distances in color spaces  such
660              as  YUV  or  YIQ correspond to perceptual color differences more
661              closely than do distances in RGB space.  These color spaces  may
662              give  better  results  when  color  reducing an image.  Refer to
663              quantize for more details.  Two gray colorspaces are  supported.
664              The  Rec601Luma space is based on the recommendations for legacy
665              NTSC television (ITU-R BT.601-5).  The Rec709Luma space is based
666              on  the  recommendations  for  HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is
667              suitable for use with computer graphics,  and  for  contemporary
668              CRT   displays.   The  GRAY  colorspace  currently  selects  the
669              Rec601Luma colorspace by default for backwards  compatibly  rea‐
670              sons. This default may be re-considered in the future.
671
672              Two  YCbCr  colorspaces  are supported. The Rec601YCbCr space is
673              based on the recommendations for legacy NTSC  television  (ITU-R
674              BT.601-5).  The Rec709CbCr space is based on the recommendations
675              for HDTV (Rec.  ITU-R BT.709-5) and is suitable for suitable for
676              use  with  computer graphics, and for contemporary CRT displays.
677              The YCbCr colorspace specification is equivalent toRec601YCbCr.
678
679
680              The Transparent color space behaves uniquely  in  that  it  pre‐
681              serves the matte channel of the image if it exists.
682
683              The  -colors  or  -monochrome option, or saving to a file format
684              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
685              take effect.
686
687       -comment <string>
688              annotate an image with a comment
689
690              Use  this option to assign a specific comment to the image, when
691              writing to an image  format  that  supports  comments.  You  can
692              include  the image filename, type, width, height, or other image
693              attribute by embedding special format  characters  listed  under
694              the  -format option.  The comment is not drawn on the image, but
695              is embedded in the image datastream via a "Comment" tag or simi‐
696              lar  mechanism.   If  you  want the comment to be visible on the
697              image itself, use the -draw option instead.
698
699              For example,
700
701                   -comment "%m:%f %wx%h"
702
703
704              produces an image comment of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
705              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
706
707              If the first character of string is @, the image comment is read
708              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
709              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
710              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
711              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file could be incorporated in a
712              comment in the output file (a security risk).
713
714              If the -comment option appears multiple  times,  only  the  last
715              comment is stored.
716
717              In  PNG  images,  the  comment is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk
718              with the keyword "comment".
719
720       -compose <operator>
721              the type of image composition
722
723              The description of  composition  uses  abstract  terminology  in
724              order  to  allow  the  the  description  to be more clear, while
725              avoiding constant values which  are  specific  to  a  particular
726              build  configuration.  Each  image  pixel is represented by red,
727              green, and blue levels (which  are  equal  for  a  gray  pixel).
728              MaxRGB  is the maximum integral value which may be stored in the
729              red, green, or blue channels of the image. Each image pixel  may
730              also  optionally (if the image matte channel is enabled) have an
731              associated level of opacity (ranging from  opaque  to  transpar‐
732              ent),  which may be used to determine the influence of the pixel
733              color when compositing the pixel with another  image  pixel.  If
734              the  image  matte  channel  is  disabled, then all pixels in the
735              image are treated as opaque.  The color of an  opaque  pixel  is
736              fully  visible  while  the color of a transparent pixel color is
737              entirely absent (pixel color is ignored).
738
739              By definition, raster images have a rectangular shape. All image
740              rows  are  of  equal length, and all image columns have the same
741              number of rows. By treating the  opacity  channel  as  a  visual
742              "mask"  the rectangular image may be given a "shape" by treating
743              the opacity channel as a cookie-cutter  for  the  image.  Pixels
744              within  the shape are opaque, while pixels outside the shape are
745              transparent. Pixels on the boundary of the shape may be  between
746              opaque and transparent in order to provide antialiasing (visual‐
747              ly smooth edges). The description of the  composition  operators
748              use  this concept of image "shape" in order to make the descrip‐
749              tion of the operators easier to understand. While it  is  conve‐
750              nient to describe the operators in terms of "shapes" they are by
751              no means limited to mask-style operations since they  are  based
752              on  continuous  floating-point  mathematics  rather  than simple
753              boolean operations.
754
755              By default, the Over composite operator is used.  The  following
756              composite operators are available:
757
758                   Over
759                   In
760                   Out
761                   Atop
762                   Xor
763                   Plus
764                   Minus
765                   Add
766                   Subtract
767                   Difference
768                   Divide
769                   Multiply
770                   Bumpmap
771                   Copy
772                   CopyRed
773                   CopyGreen
774                   CopyBlue
775                   CopyOpacity
776                   CopyCyan
777                   CopyMagenta
778                   CopyYellow
779                   CopyBlack
780
781
782              The behavior of each operator is described below.
783
784
785               Over
786
787                    The result will be the union of the two image shapes, with
788                    opaque areas of change-image obscuring base-image  in  the
789                    region of overlap.
790
791               In
792
793                    The  result  is  simply  change-image  cut by the shape of
794                    base-image. None of the image data of base-image  will  be
795                    in the result.
796
797               Out
798
799                    The  resulting  image  is  change-image  with the shape of
800                    base-image cut out.
801
802               Atop
803
804                    The result is the same shape as base-image,  with  change-
805                    image obscuring base-image where the image shapes overlap.
806                    Note this differs from over because the portion of change-
807                    image  outside  base-image's  shape does not appear in the
808                    result.
809
810               Xor
811
812                    The result is the image data from  both  change-image  and
813                    base-image that is outside the overlap region. The overlap
814                    region will be blank.
815
816               Plus
817
818                    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output  val‐
819                    ues are cropped to MaxRGB (no overflow). This operation is
820                    independent of the matte channels.
821
822               Minus
823
824                    The result of change-image -  base-image,  with  underflow
825                    cropped  to  zero.  The  matte  channel is ignored (set to
826                    opaque, full coverage).
827
828               Add
829
830                    The result of change-image  +  base-image,  with  overflow
831                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1).
832
833               Subtract
834
835                    The  result  of  change-image - base-image, with underflow
836                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract oper‐
837                    ators can be used to perform reversible transformations.
838
839               Difference
840
841                    The result of abs(change-image - base-image). This is use‐
842                    ful for comparing two very similar images.
843
844               Divide
845
846                    The result of change-image / base-image.  This  is  useful
847                    for  improving the readability of text on unevenly illumi‐
848                    nated photos (by using a gaussian blurred copy of  change-
849                    image as base-image).
850
851               Multiply
852
853                    The  result  of  change-image * base-image. This is useful
854                    for the creation of drop-shadows.
855
856               Bumpmap
857
858                    The result base-image shaded by change-image.
859
860               Copy
861
862                    The resulting image is base-image  replaced  with  change-
863                    image. Here the matte information is ignored.
864
865               CopyRed
866
867                    The  resulting  image  is  the  red  channel in base-image
868                    replaced with the red channel in change-image.  The  other
869                    channels are copied untouched.
870
871               CopyGreen
872
873                    The  resulting  image  is  the green channel in base-image
874                    replaced with the green channel in change-image. The other
875                    channels are copied untouched.
876
877               CopyBlue
878
879                    The  resulting  image  is  the  blue channel in base-image
880                    replaced with the blue channel in change-image. The  other
881                    channels are copied untouched.
882
883               CopyOpacity
884
885                    The  resulting  image is the opacity channel in base-image
886                    replaced with the opacity  channel  in  change-image.  The
887                    other channels are copied untouched.
888
889               CopyCyan
890
891                    The  resulting  image  is  the  cyan channel in base-image
892                    replaced with the cyan channel in change-image. The  other
893                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
894                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
895
896               CopyMagenta
897
898                    The resulting image is the magenta channel  in  base-image
899                    replaced  with  the  magenta  channel in change-image. The
900                    other channels are copied untouched. Use of this  operator
901                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
902
903               CopyYellow
904
905                    The  resulting  image  is the yellow channel in base-image
906                    replaced with the  yellow  channel  in  change-image.  The
907                    other  channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
908                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
909
910               CopyBlack
911
912                    The resulting image is the  black  channel  in  base-image
913                    replaced with the black channel in change-image. The other
914                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
915                    requires  that  base-image  be  in  CMYK(A) colorspace. If
916                    change-image is not in CMYK space, then  the  change-image
917                    pixel intensities are used.
918
919
920
921
922       -compress <type>
923              the type of image compression
924
925              Choices  are:  None,  BZip, Fax, Group3, Group4, JPEG, Lossless,
926              LZW, RLE, Zip, LZMA, JPEG2000, JPEG2000, JBIG, JBIG2,  WebP,  or
927              ZSTD.
928
929
930              Specify  +compress  to store the binary image in an uncompressed
931              format.  The default is the compression type  of  the  specified
932              image file.
933
934              "Lossless"  refers  to lossless JPEG, which is only available if
935              the JPEG library has been patched to support it. Use of lossless
936              JPEG is generally not recommended.
937
938              Use  the -quality option to set the compression level to be used
939              by the JPEG, JPEG-2000, PNG, MIFF, MPEG, and TIFF encoders.  Use
940              the  -sampling-factor  option  to  set the sampling factor to be
941              used by the DPX, JPEG, MPEG, and YUV encoders  for  downsampling
942              the chroma channels.
943
944       -contrast
945              enhance or reduce the image contrast
946
947              This  option  enhances  the  intensity  differences  between the
948              lighter and darker elements  of  the  image.  Use  -contrast  to
949              enhance the image or +contrast to reduce the image contrast.
950
951
952              For a more pronounced effect you can repeat the option:
953
954                  gm convert rose: -contrast -contrast rose_c2.png
955
956
957       -convolve <kernel>
958              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
959
960              The  kernel  is  specified as a comma-separated list of floating
961              point values, ordered left-to right, starting with the top  row.
962              The  order of the kernel is determined by the square root of the
963              number of entries.  Presently only square kernels are supported.
964
965       -create-directories
966              create output directory if required
967
968              Use this option with -output-directory if the input  paths  con‐
969              tain  subdirectories  and it is desired to create similar subdi‐
970              rectories in the output directory.  Without this option, mogrify
971              will fail if the required output directory does not exist.
972
973       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
974              preferred size and location of the cropped image
975
976              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
977
978              The  width  and  height  give the size of the image that remains
979              after cropping, and x and y are offsets that give  the  location
980              of  the top left corner of the cropped image with respect to the
981              original image.  To specify the amount to be removed, use -shave
982              instead.
983
984              If the x and y offsets are present, a single image is generated,
985              consisting of the pixels from the cropping region.  The  offsets
986              specify  the  location  of the upper left corner of the cropping
987              region measured downward and rightward with respect to the upper
988              left  corner  of  the  image.  If the -gravity option is present
989              with NorthEast, East, or SouthEast gravity, it  gives  the  dis‐
990              tance  leftward  from  the  right edge of the image to the right
991              edge of the cropping region.  Similarly, if the -gravity  option
992              is present with SouthWest, South, or SouthEast gravity, the dis‐
993              tance is measured upward between the bottom edges.
994
995              If the x and y offsets are omitted, a set of tiles of the speci‐
996              fied  geometry,  covering  the entire input image, is generated.
997              The rightmost tiles and the bottom  tiles  are  smaller  if  the
998              specified  geometry  extends  beyond the dimensions of the input
999              image.
1000
1001       -cycle <amount>
1002              displace image colormap by amount
1003
1004              Amount defines the  number  of  positions  each  colormap  entry
1005              isshifted.
1006
1007
1008       -debug <events>
1009              enable debug printout
1010
1011              The  events  parameter  specifies which events are to be logged.
1012              It can be either None, All, or a comma-separated list consisting
1013              of  one or more of the following domains: Annotate, Blob, Cache,
1014              Coder,  Configure,  Deprecate,  Error,  Exception,   FatalError,
1015              Information,  Locale,  Option,  Render, Resource, TemporaryFile,
1016              Transform, User.  Warning, or X11, For example, to log cache and
1017              blob events, use
1018
1019                  gm convert -debug "Cache,Blob" rose: rose.png
1020
1021
1022              The  "User"  domain  is  normally  empty, but developers can log
1023              "User" events in their private copy of GraphicsMagick.
1024
1025              Use the -log option to specify the format for debugging output.
1026
1027              Use +debug to turn off all logging.
1028
1029              An alternative to using -debug is to use the MAGICK_DEBUG  envi‐
1030              ronment  variable. The allowed values for the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1031              ronment variable are the same as for the -debug option.
1032
1033       -deconstruct
1034              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
1035
1036              This option compares each image with the next in a sequence  and
1037              returns  the maximum bounding region of any pixel differences it
1038              discovers.  This method can undo a coalesced  sequence  returned
1039              by  the  -coalesce  option, and is useful for removing redundant
1040              information from a GIF or MNG animation.
1041
1042              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1043              option.   If  the  -deconstruct  option appears after all of the
1044              input images, all images are deconstructed.
1045
1046       -define <key>{=<value>},...
1047              add coder/decoder specific options This option  creates  one  or
1048              more  definitions  for  coders and decoders to use while reading
1049              and writing image data. Definitions may be passed to coders  and
1050              decoders  to  control options that are specific to certain image
1051              formats. If value is missing for a definition,  an  empty-valued
1052              definition  of  a  flag  will be created with that name. This is
1053              used to control on/off options. Use +define <key>,... to  remove
1054              definitions  previously  created.  Use +define "*" to remove all
1055              existing definitions.
1056
1057              The following definitions may be created:
1058
1059
1060               cineon:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1061
1062                    Use the cineon:colorspace option  when  reading  a  Cineon
1063                    file  to specify the colorspace the Cineon file uses. This
1064                    overrides the colorspace type implied by  the  DPX  header
1065                    (if any).
1066
1067               dpx:bits-per-sample=<value>
1068
1069                    If  the dpx:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1070                    will write DPX images with the specified bits per  sample,
1071                    overriding any existing depth value. If this option is not
1072                    specified, then the value is based on the  existing  image
1073                    depth value from the original image file. The DPX standard
1074                    supports bits per sample values of 1, 8, 10, 12,  and  16.
1075                    Many DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type
1076                    A padding (see below).
1077
1078               dpx:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1079
1080                    Use the dpx:colorspace option when reading a DPX  file  to
1081                    specify  the  colorspace the DPX file uses. This overrides
1082                    the colorspace type implied by the DPX header (if any).
1083
1084               dpx:packing-method={packed|a|b|lsbpad|msbpad}
1085
1086                    DPX samples are output within 32-bit words.  They  may  be
1087                    tightly  packed  end-to-end  within  the words ("packed"),
1088                    padded with null bits to the right of the sample  ("a"  or
1089                    "lsbpad"),  or  padded  with  null bits to the left of the
1090                    sample ("b" or "msbpad"). This option only has  an  effect
1091                    for  sample  sizes  of  10  or 12 bits. If samples are not
1092                    packed, the DPX standard recommends type A  padding.  Many
1093                    DPX  readers  demand  a sample size of 10 bits with type A
1094                    padding.
1095
1096               dpx:pixel-endian={lsb|msb}
1097
1098                    Allows the user to specify the endian order of the  pixels
1099                    when  reading  or writing the DPX files. Sometimes this is
1100                    useful if the file is (or must be) written incorrectly  so
1101                    that  the file header and the pixels use different endian‐
1102                    ness.
1103
1104               dpx:swap-samples={true|false}
1105
1106                    GraphicsMagick strives to adhere to the DPX  standard  but
1107                    certain aspects of the standard can be quite confusing. As
1108                    a result, some 10-bit DPX files have Red and  Blue  inter‐
1109                    changed,  or  Cb  and  Cr interchanged due to an different
1110                    interpretation of  the  standard,  or  getting  the  wires
1111                    crossed.  The  swap-samples  option  may  be supplied when
1112                    reading or writing in order to read  or  write  using  the
1113                    necessary sample order.
1114
1115               jp2:rate=<value>
1116
1117                    Specify  the  compression  factor  to  use  while  writing
1118                    JPEG-2000 files. The compression factor is the  reciprocal
1119                    of  the  compression ratio. The valid range is 0.0 to 1.0,
1120                    with 1.0 indicating lossless compression. If defined, this
1121                    value  overrides the -quality setting. The default quality
1122                    setting of 75 results in a rate value of 0.06641.
1123
1124               jpeg:block-smoothing={true|false}
1125
1126                    Enables or disables block smoothing when  reading  a  JPEG
1127                    file (default enabled).
1128
1129               jpeg:dct-method=<value>
1130
1131                    Selects  the  IJG  JPEG library DCT implementation to use.
1132                    The encoding implementations vary in  speed  and  encoding
1133                    error.  The  available choices for value are islow, ifast,
1134                    float, default and fastest. Note that  fastest  might  not
1135                    necessarily  be  fastest  on  your  CPU,  depending on the
1136                    choices made when the JPEG library was built and how  your
1137                    CPU behaves.
1138
1139               jpeg:fancy-upsampling={true|false}
1140
1141                    Enables  or  disables fancy upsampling when reading a JPEG
1142                    file (default enabled).
1143
1144               jpeg:max-scan-number=<value>
1145
1146                    Specifies an integer value for the maximum number of  pro‐
1147                    gressive  scans allowed in a JPEG file.  The default maxi‐
1148                    mum is 100 scans.  This limit is imposed due to a weakness
1149                    in the JPEG standard which allows small JPEG files to take
1150                    many minutes or hours to be read.
1151
1152               jpeg:max-warnings=<value>
1153
1154                    Specifies an integer  value  for  how  many  warnings  are
1155                    allowed  for any given error type before being promoted to
1156                    a hard error.  JPEG  files  producing  excessive  warnings
1157                    indicate a problem with the file.
1158
1159               jpeg:optimize-coding={true|false}
1160
1161                    Selects if huffman encoding should be used. Huffman encod‐
1162                    ing is enabled by default, but may be  disabled  for  very
1163                    large  images  since  it encoding requires that the entire
1164                    image be buffered in  memory.  Huffman  encoding  produces
1165                    smaller  JPEG  files  at  the expense of added compression
1166                    time and memory consumption.
1167
1168               jpeg:preserve-settings
1169
1170                    If the jpeg:preserve-settings flag is  defined,  the  JPEG
1171                    encoder  will use the same "quality" and "sampling-factor"
1172                    settings that were found in the input file, if  the  input
1173                    was  in  JPEG format. These settings are also preserved if
1174                    the input is a JPEG file and the output is a JNG file.  If
1175                    the colorspace of the output file differs from that of the
1176                    input file, the quality setting is preserved but the  sam‐
1177                    pling-factors are not.
1178
1179               pcl:fit-to-page
1180
1181                    If  the  pcl:fit-to-page flag is defined, then the printer
1182                    is requested to scale the  image  to  fit  the  page  size
1183                    (width and/or height).
1184               mng:maximum-loops=<value>
1185
1186                    mng:maximum-loops  specifies  the  maximum number of loops
1187                    allowed to be specified by a MNG LOOP  chunk.  Without  an
1188                    imposed  limit,  a MNG file could request up to 2147483647
1189                    loops, which could run for a very long time.  The  current
1190                    default limit is 512 loops.
1191
1192               pdf:use-cropbox={true|false}
1193
1194                    If  the  pdf:use-cropbox  flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1195                    script is requested to apply the PDF crop box.
1196
1197               pdf:stop-on-error={true|false}
1198
1199                    If the pdf:stop-on-error flag is set to true, then  Ghost‐
1200                    script  is  requested  to stop processing the PDF when the
1201                    first error is encountered.  Otherwise it will attempt  to
1202                    process all requested pages.
1203
1204               ps:imagemask
1205
1206                    If  the  ps:imagemask  flag  is  defined, the PS3 and EPS3
1207                    coders will create Postscript files  that  render  bilevel
1208                    images  with  the Postscript imagemask operator instead of
1209                    the image operator.
1210
1211               ptif:minimum-geometry=<geometry>
1212
1213                    If the ptif:minimum-geometry key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1214                    ick  will  use  it  to determine the minimum frame size to
1215                    output when writing a pyramid TIFF file (a TIFF file  con‐
1216                    taining  a  succession  of  reduced  versions of the first
1217                    frame). The default minimum geometry is 32x32.
1218
1219               tiff:alpha={unspecified|associated|unassociated}
1220
1221                    Specify the TIFF alpha channel type when reading or  writ‐
1222                    ing  TIFF  files, overriding the normal value. The default
1223                    alpha channel type for new  files  is  unspecified  alpha.
1224                    Existing alpha settings are preserved when converting from
1225                    one TIFF file to another. When a TIFF file uses associated
1226                    alpha,  the image pixels are pre-multiplied (i.e. altered)
1227                    with the alpha  channel.  Files  with  "associated"  alpha
1228                    appear  as  if they were alpha composited on a black back‐
1229                    ground when the matte channel is disabled. If the  unasso‐
1230                    ciated  alpha  type is selected, then the alpha channel is
1231                    saved without altering the  pixels.  Photoshop  recognizes
1232                    associated  alpha as transparency information, if the file
1233                    is saved with unassociated alpha, the alpha information is
1234                    loaded  as  an  independent  channel.   Note that for many
1235                    years, ImageMagick and GraphicsMagick marked TIFF files as
1236                    using  associated  alpha, without properly pre-multiplying
1237                    the pixels.
1238
1239               tiff:fill-order={msb2lsb|lsb2msb}
1240
1241                    If the tiff:fill-order key is defined, GraphicsMagick will
1242                    use  it to determine the bit fill order used while writing
1243                    TIFF files. The normal default is "msb2lsb", which matches
1244                    the  native  bit order of all modern CPUs. The only excep‐
1245                    tion to this is when Group3 or Group4 FAX  compression  is
1246                    requested  since  FAX  machines  send data in bit-reversed
1247                    order and therefore  RFC  2301  recommends  using  reverse
1248                    order.
1249
1250               tiff:group-three-options=<value>
1251
1252                    If  the tiff:group-three-options key is defined, Graphics‐
1253                    Magick will use it to set  the  group3  options  tag  when
1254                    writing group3-compressed TIFF.  Please see the TIFF spec‐
1255                    ification for the usage of this tag.  The default value is
1256                    4.
1257
1258               tiff:ignore-tags=<tags>
1259
1260                    If the tiff:ignore-tags key is defined, then it is used as
1261                    a list of  comma-delimited  integer  TIFF  tag  values  to
1262                    ignore  while  reading  the  TIFF file.  This is useful in
1263                    order to be able to read files which which otherwise  fail
1264                    to  read  due  to problems with TIFF tags.  Note that some
1265                    TIFF tags are required in order to be  able  to  read  the
1266                    image data at all.
1267
1268               tiff:report-warnings={false|true}
1269
1270                    If  the  tiff:report-warnings  key  is  defined and set to
1271                    true, then TIFF warnings are reported as a warning  excep‐
1272                    tion  rather  than  as a coder log message.  Such warnings
1273                    are reported after the image has  been  read  or  written.
1274                    Most  TIFF warnings are benign but sometimes they may help
1275                    deduce problems with the TIFF file, or  help  detect  that
1276                    the  TIFF file requires a special application to read suc‐
1277                    cessfully due to the use  of  proprietary  or  specialized
1278                    extensions.
1279
1280               tiff:sample-format={unsigned|ieeefp}
1281
1282                    If  the  tiff:sample-format key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1283                    will use it to determine  the  sample  format  used  while
1284                    writing  TIFF  files.  The  default is "unsigned". Specify
1285                    "ieeefp" in order to write floating-point TIFF files  with
1286                    float   (32-bit)   or  double  (64-bit)  values.  Use  the
1287                    tiff:bits-per-sample  define  to  determine  the  type  of
1288                    floating-point value to use.
1289
1290               tiff:max-sample-value=<value>
1291
1292                    If  the tiff:max-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1293                    ick will use the assigned value as  the  maximum  floating
1294                    point  value  while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1295                    TIFFs. Otherwise the maximum value is  1.0  or  the  value
1296                    obtained from the file's SMaxSampleValue tag (if present).
1297                    The floating  point  data  is  currently  not  scanned  in
1298                    advance to determine a best maximum sample value so if the
1299                    range is not  1.0,  or  the  SMaxSampleValue  tag  is  not
1300                    present,  it  may be necessary to (intelligently) use this
1301                    parameter to properly read a file.
1302
1303               tiff:min-sample-value=<value>
1304
1305                    If the tiff:min-sample-value key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1306                    ick  will  use  the assigned value as the minimum floating
1307                    point value while reading or writing IEEE  floating  point
1308                    TIFFs.  Otherwise  the  minimum  value is 0.0 or the value
1309                    obtained from the file's SMinSampleValue tag (if present).
1310
1311               tiff:bits-per-sample=<value>
1312
1313                    If the tiff:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1314                    will  write  images  with  the  specified bits per sample,
1315                    overriding any existing depth value. Value may be  any  in
1316                    the  range  of  1 to 32, or 64 when the default ´unsigned'
1317                    format is written, or  16/32/24/64  if  IEEEFP  format  is
1318                    written.   Please note that the baseline TIFF 6.0 specifi‐
1319                    cation only requires readers to handle certain  powers  of
1320                    two,  and the values to be handled depend on the nature of
1321                    the image (e.g. colormapped, grayscale, RGB, CMYK).
1322
1323               tiff:samples-per-pixel=<value>
1324
1325                    If the tiff:samples-per-pixel key is defined to  a  value,
1326                    the  TIFF  coder  will  write TIFF images with the defined
1327                    samples per pixel, overriding  any  value  stored  in  the
1328                    image. This option should not normally be used.
1329
1330               tiff:rows-per-strip=<value>
1331
1332                    Allows  the  user  to  specify the number of rows per TIFF
1333                    strip.  Rounded up to a multiple of  16  when  using  JPEG
1334                    compression. Ignored when using tiles.
1335
1336               tiff:strip-per-page=true
1337
1338                    Requests that the image is written in a single TIFF strip.
1339                    This is normally the default when group3  or  group4  com‐
1340                    pression is requested within reasonable limits. Requesting
1341                    a single strip for large images may result in failure  due
1342                    to resource consumption in the writer or reader.
1343
1344               tiff:tile
1345
1346                    Enable writing tiled TIFF (rather than stripped) using the
1347                    default tile size. Tiled TIFF organizes the  image  as  an
1348                    array  of smaller images (tiles) in order to enable random
1349                    access.
1350
1351               tiff:tile-geometry=<width>x<height>
1352
1353                    Specify the tile size to use  while  writing  tiled  TIFF.
1354                    Width  and height should be a multiple of 16. If the value
1355                    is not a multiple of 16, then it  will  be  rounded  down.
1356                    Enables  tiled  TIFF  if  it has not already been enabled.
1357                    GraphicsMagick does not use tiled  storage  internally  so
1358                    tiles  need to be converted back and forth from the inter‐
1359                    nal scanline-oriented storage  to  tile-oriented  storage.
1360                    Testing  with  typical RGB images shows that useful square
1361                    tile size values range from 128x128  to  1024x1024.  Large
1362                    images  which require using a disk-based pixel cache bene‐
1363                    fit from large tile sizes while images which fit in memory
1364                    work well with smaller tile sizes.
1365
1366               tiff:tile-width=<width>
1367
1368                    Specify  the  tile  width to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1369                    The tile height is then defaulted to an appropriate  size.
1370                    Width  should  be  a multiple of 16. If the value is not a
1371                    multiple of 16, then it will  be  rounded  down.   Enables
1372                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1373
1374               tiff:tile-height=<height>
1375
1376                    Specify  the  tile height to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1377                    The tile width is then defaulted to an  appropriate  size.
1378                    Height  should  be a multiple of 16. If the value is not a
1379                    multiple of 16, then it will  be  rounded  down.   Enables
1380                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1381
1382               tiff:webp-lossless={TRUE|FALSE}
1383
1384                    Specify  a  value  of  TRUE  to enable lossless mode while
1385                    writing WebP-compressed TIFF files. The WebP webp:lossless
1386                    option  may  also  be used.  The quality factor set by the
1387                    -quality option may be used  to  influence  the  level  of
1388                    effort expended while compressing.
1389
1390               tiff:zstd-compress-level=<value>
1391
1392                    Specify  the  compression level to use while writing Zstd-
1393                    compressed TIFF files. The valid range is 1 to 22. If this
1394                    define  is not specified, then the 'quality' value is used
1395                    such that the default quality setting of 75 is  translated
1396                    to  a compress level of 9 such that ´quality' has a useful
1397                    range of 10-184 if used for this purpose.
1398
1399               webp:lossless={true|false}
1400
1401                    Enable lossless encoding.
1402
1403               webp:method={0-6}
1404
1405                    Quality/speed trade-off.
1406
1407               webp:image-hint={default,graph,photo,picture}
1408
1409                    Hint for image type.
1410
1411               webp:target-size=<integer>
1412
1413                    Target size in bytes.
1414
1415               webp:target-psnr=<float>
1416
1417                    Minimal distortion to try to achieve.
1418
1419               webp:segments={1-4}
1420
1421                    Maximum number of segments to use.
1422
1423               webp:sns-strength={0-100}
1424
1425                    Spatial Noise Shaping.
1426
1427               webp:filter-strength={0-100}
1428
1429                    Filter strength.
1430
1431               webp:filter-sharpness={0-7}
1432
1433                    Filter sharpness.
1434
1435               webp:filter-type={0,1}
1436
1437                    Filtering type. 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if  fil‐
1438                    ter-strength > 0 or autofilter is enabled).
1439
1440               webp:auto-filter={true|false}
1441
1442                    Auto adjust filter's strength.
1443
1444               webp:alpha-compression=<integer>
1445
1446                    Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = com‐
1447                    pressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1.
1448
1449               webp:alpha-filtering=<integer>
1450
1451                    Predictive filtering method for alpha plane. 0:  none,  1:
1452                    fast, 2: best. Default is 1.
1453
1454               webp:alpha-quality={0-100}
1455
1456                    Between  0  (smallest size) and 100 (lossless). Default is
1457                    100.
1458
1459               webp:pass=[1..10]
1460
1461                    Number of entropy-analysis passes.
1462
1463               webp:show-compressed={true|false}
1464
1465                    Export the compressed picture back.  In-loop filtering  is
1466                    not applied.
1467
1468               webp:preprocessing=[0,1,2]
1469
1470                    0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering
1471
1472               webp:partitions=[0-3]
1473
1474                    log2(number  of token partitions) in [0..3].  Default is 0
1475                    for easier progressive decoding.
1476
1477               webp:partition-limit={0-100}
1478
1479                    Quality degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on  pre‐
1480                    diction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum pos‐
1481                    sible degradation).
1482
1483               webp:emulate-jpeg-size={true|false}
1484
1485                    If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better
1486                    match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Gen‐
1487                    erally, the output size will be similar but  the  degrada‐
1488                    tion will be lower.
1489
1490               webp:thread-level=<integer>
1491
1492                    If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding.
1493
1494               webp:low-memory={true|false}
1495
1496                    If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use)
1497
1498               webp:use-sharp-yuv={true|false}
1499
1500                    If  set,  if needed, use sharp (and slow) RGB->YUV conver‐
1501                    sion
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506               For example, to create a postscript file that will render  only
1507               the black pixels of a bilevel image, use:
1508
1509                   gm convert bilevel.tif -define ps:imagemask eps3:stencil.ps
1510
1511
1512       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
1513              display the next image after pausing
1514
1515              This  option  is  useful  for  regulating the animation of image
1516              sequences Delay/100 seconds must expire before  the  display  of
1517              the  next image. The default is no delay between each showing of
1518              the image sequence. The maximum delay is 65535.
1519
1520              You can specify a delay range (e.g. -delay  10-500)  which  sets
1521              the minimum and maximum delay.
1522
1523       -density <width>x<height>
1524              horizontal  and  vertical resolution in pixels of the image This
1525              option specifies the image resolution to store while encoding  a
1526              raster  image or the canvas resolution while rendering (reading)
1527              vector formats such as Postscript, PDF,  WMF,  and  SVG  into  a
1528              raster  image.  Image resolution provides the unit of measure to
1529              apply when rendering to an output device or  raster  image.  The
1530              default  unit  of  measure is in dots per inch (DPI). The -units
1531              option may be used to select dots per centimeter instead.
1532               The default resolution is 72 dots per inch, which is equivalent
1533              to one point per pixel (Macintosh and Postscript standard). Com‐
1534              puter screens are normally 72 or 96 dots per inch while printers
1535              typically  support  150,  300,  600,  or  1200 dots per inch. To
1536              determine the resolution of your display, use a ruler to measure
1537              the  width of your screen in inches, and divide by the number of
1538              horizontal pixels (1024 on a 1024x768  display).   If  the  file
1539              format supports it, this option may be used to update the stored
1540              image resolution. Note that Photoshop stores and  obtains  image
1541              resolution  from a proprietary embedded profile. If this profile
1542              is not stripped from the image, then Photoshop will continue  to
1543              treat  the image using its former resolution, ignoring the image
1544              resolution specified in the standard file header.   The  density
1545              option  is an attribute and does not alter the underlying raster
1546              image. It may be used to adjust the rendered  size  for  desktop
1547              publishing  purposes  by adjusting the scale applied to the pix‐
1548              els. To resize the image so that it is the same size at  a  dif‐
1549              ferent resolution, use the -resample option.
1550
1551       -depth <value>
1552              depth of the image
1553
1554              This  is  the  number of bits of color to preserve in the image.
1555              Any value between 1 and QuantumDepth (build option) may be spec‐
1556              ified,  although  8  or  16 are the most common values. Use this
1557              option to specify the depth of raw images whose depth is unknown
1558              such  as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK, or to change the depth of any image
1559              after it has been read.  The depth option is applied to the pix‐
1560              els  immediately  so it may be used as a form of simple compres‐
1561              sion by discarding the  least  significant  bits.  Reducing  the
1562              depth  in advance may speed up color quantization, and help cre‐
1563              ate smaller file sizes when using a compression  algorithm  like
1564              LZW or ZIP.
1565
1566       -descend
1567              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
1568
1569       -despeckle
1570              reduce the speckles within an image
1571
1572       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
1573              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
1574
1575              With this option, composite image is used as a displacement map.
1576              Black, within the displacement map, is a maximum  positive  dis‐
1577              placement.   White is a maximum negative displacement and middle
1578              gray is neutral.  The displacement is scaled  to  determine  the
1579              pixel  shift.   By default, the displacement applies in both the
1580              horizontal and vertical directions.   However,  if  you  specify
1581              mask,  composite image is the horizontal X displacement and mask
1582              the vertical Y displacement.
1583
1584       -display <host:display[.screen]>
1585              specifies the X server to contact
1586
1587              This option is used with convert for  obtaining  image  or  font
1588              from this X server.  See X(1).
1589
1590       -dispose <method>
1591              GIF disposal method
1592
1593              The Disposal Method indicates the way in which the graphic is to
1594              be treated after being displayed.
1595
1596              Here are the valid methods:
1597
1598                  Undefined       No disposal specified.
1599                  None            Do not dispose between frames.
1600                  Background      Overwrite the image area with
1601                                  the background color.
1602                  Previous        Overwrite the image area with
1603                                  what was there prior to rendering
1604                                  the image.
1605
1606
1607       -dissolve <percent>
1608              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
1609
1610              The opacity of the composite image is multiplied  by  the  given
1611              percent, then it is composited over the main image.
1612
1613       -dither
1614              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
1615
1616              The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity resolution
1617              for spatial resolution by averaging the intensities  of  several
1618              neighboring  pixels.  Images which suffer from severe contouring
1619              when reducing colors can be improved with this option.
1620
1621              The -colors or -monochrome option is required for this option to
1622              take effect.
1623
1624              Use +dither to turn off dithering and to render PostScript with‐
1625              out text or graphic aliasing. Disabling dithering often (but not
1626              always) leads to decreased processing time.
1627
1628       -draw <string>
1629              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
1630
1631              Use  this  option  to annotate an image with one or more graphic
1632              primitives.  The primitives include  shapes,  text,  transforma‐
1633              tions, and pixel operations.  The shape primitives are
1634
1635                   point           x,y
1636                   line            x0,y0 x1,y1
1637                   rectangle       x0,y0 x1,y1
1638                   roundRectangle  x0,y0 x1,y1 wc,hc
1639                   arc             x0,y0 x1,y1 a0,a1
1640                   ellipse         x0,y0 rx,ry a0,a1
1641                   circle          x0,y0 x1,y1
1642                   polyline        x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1643                   polygon         x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1644                   Bezier          x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1645                   path            path specification
1646                   image           operator x0,y0 w,h filename
1647
1648
1649              The text primitive is
1650
1651                   text            x0,y0 string
1652
1653
1654              The text gravity primitive is
1655
1656                   gravity         NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center,
1657                                   East, SouthWest, South, or SouthEast
1658
1659
1660              The  text  gravity  primitive only affects the placement of text
1661              and does not interact with the other primitives.  It is  equiva‐
1662              lent to using the -gravity commandline option, except that it is
1663              limited in scope to the -draw option in which it appears.
1664
1665              The transformation primitives are
1666
1667                   rotate          degrees
1668                   translate       dx,dy
1669                   scale           sx,sy
1670                   skewX           degrees
1671                   skewY           degrees
1672
1673
1674              The pixel operation primitives are
1675
1676                   color           x0,y0 method
1677                   matte           x0,y0 method
1678
1679
1680              The shape primitives are drawn in the  color  specified  in  the
1681              preceding  -stroke  option. Except for the line and point primi‐
1682              tives, they are filled with the color specified in the preceding
1683              -fill option.  For unfilled shapes, use -fill none.
1684
1685              Point requires a single coordinate.
1686
1687              Line requires a start and end coordinate.
1688
1689              Rectangle expects an upper left and lower right coordinate.
1690
1691              RoundRectangle  has  the  upper left and lower right coordinates
1692              and the width and height of the corners.
1693
1694              Circle has a center coordinate and a coordinate  for  the  outer
1695              edge.
1696
1697              Use  Arc to inscribe an elliptical arc within a rectangle.  Arcs
1698              require a start and end point as well as the degree of  rotation
1699              (e.g. 130,30 200,100 45,90).
1700
1701              Use  Ellipse  to  draw  a  partial ellipse centered at the given
1702              point with the x-axis and y-axis radius and start and end of arc
1703              in degrees (e.g. 100,100 100,150 0,360).
1704
1705              Finally,  polyline and polygon require three or more coordinates
1706              to define its boundaries.  Coordinates are integers separated by
1707              an  optional comma.  For example, to define a circle centered at
1708              100,100 that extends to 150,150 use:
1709
1710                   -draw 'circle 100,100 150,150'
1711
1712
1713              Paths (See Paths) represent an outline of  an  object  which  is
1714              defined  in  terms  of  moveto (set a new current point), lineto
1715              (draw a straight line), curveto (draw  a  curve  using  a  cubic
1716              Bezier),  arc  (elliptical or circular arc) and closepath (close
1717              the current shape by drawing a line to  the  last  moveto)  ele‐
1718              ments. Compound paths (i.e., a path with subpaths, each consist‐
1719              ing of a single moveto followed by one or  more  line  or  curve
1720              operations)  are possible to allow effects such as "donut holes"
1721              in objects.
1722
1723              Use image to composite an image with another image.  Follow  the
1724              image keyword with the composite operator, image location, image
1725              size, and filename:
1726
1727                   -draw 'image Over 100,100 225,225 image.jpg'
1728
1729
1730              You can use 0,0 for the image  size,  which  means  to  use  the
1731              actual  dimensions found in the image header. Otherwise, it will
1732              be scaled to the given dimensions.  See -compose for a  descrip‐
1733              tion of the composite operators.
1734
1735              Use text to annotate an image with text. Follow the text coordi‐
1736              nates with a string. If the string has embedded spaces,  enclose
1737              it  in  single  or double quotes. Optionally you can include the
1738              image filename, type, width, height, or other image attribute by
1739              embedding special format character. See -comment for details.
1740
1741              For example,
1742
1743
1744                   -draw 'text 100,100 "%m:%f %wx%h"'
1745
1746
1747              annotates  the  image  with  MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
1748              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
1749
1750              If the first character of string is @, the text is read  from  a
1751              file  titled  by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
1752              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source  that  it
1753              should be sanitized before use (a security risk).
1754
1755              Rotate  rotates  subsequent shape primitives and text primitives
1756              about the origin of the main image. If the -region  option  pre‐
1757              cedes  the  -draw  option, the origin for transformations is the
1758              upper left corner of the region.
1759
1760              Translate translates them.
1761
1762              Scale scales them.
1763
1764              SkewX and SkewY skew them with respect to the origin of the main
1765              image or the region.
1766
1767              The  transformations  modify the current affine matrix, which is
1768              initialized from  the  initial  affine  matrix  defined  by  the
1769              -affine option.  Transformations are cumulative within the -draw
1770              option.  The initial affine matrix is not affected; that  matrix
1771              is only changed by the appearance of another -affine option.  If
1772              another -draw option  appears,  the  current  affine  matrix  is
1773              reinitialized from the initial affine matrix.
1774
1775              Use  color to change the color of a pixel to the fill color (see
1776              -fill). Follow the pixel coordinate with a method:
1777
1778                   point
1779                   replace
1780                   floodfill
1781                   filltoborder
1782                   reset
1783
1784
1785              Consider the target pixel as that specified by your  coordinate.
1786              The  point  method recolors the target pixel. The replace method
1787              recolors any pixel that matches the color of the  target  pixel.
1788              Floodfill  recolors any pixel that matches the color of the tar‐
1789              get pixel and is a neighbor, whereas filltoborder  recolors  any
1790              neighbor  pixel  that  is  not  the border color. Finally, reset
1791              recolors all pixels.
1792
1793              Use matte to the change the pixel matte  value  to  transparent.
1794              Follow  the pixel coordinate with a method (see the color primi‐
1795              tive for a description of methods). The point method changes the
1796              matte  value of the target pixel. The replace method changes the
1797              matte value of any pixel that matches the color  of  the  target
1798              pixel.  Floodfill  changes  the  matte  value  of any pixel that
1799              matches the color of the target pixel and is a neighbor, whereas
1800              filltoborder  changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that
1801              is not the border color (-bordercolor).  Finally  reset  changes
1802              the matte value of all pixels.
1803
1804              You  can  set  the  primitive color, font, and font bounding box
1805              color with -fill, -font, and -box respectively. Options are pro‐
1806              cessed  in  command  line  order so be sure to use these options
1807              before the -draw option.
1808
1809       -edge <radius>
1810              detect edges within an image
1811
1812       -emboss <radius>
1813              emboss an image
1814
1815       -encoding <type>
1816              specify the text encoding
1817
1818              Choose from AdobeCustom, AdobeExpert, AdobeStandard, AppleRoman,
1819              BIG5, GB2312, Latin 2, None, SJIScode, Symbol, Unicode, Wansung.
1820
1821       -endian <type>
1822              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
1823
1824              MSB  indicates  big-endian  (e.g. SPARC, Motorola 68K) while LSB
1825              indicates little-endian (e.g. Intel 'x86,  VAX)  byte  ordering.
1826              Native indicates to use the normal ordering for the current CPU.
1827              This option currently only influences the CMYK, DPX, GRAY,  RGB,
1828              and TIFF, formats.
1829
1830              Use +endian to revert to unspecified endianness.
1831
1832       -enhance
1833              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
1834
1835       -equalize
1836              perform histogram equalization to the image
1837
1838       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
1839              composite image on background color canvas image
1840
1841              This  option  composites  the  image  on  a new background color
1842              (-background) canvas image of size <width>x<height>. The  exist‐
1843              ing  image  content  is  composited at the position specified by
1844              geometry x and y offset and/or desired gravity (-gravity)  using
1845              the  current  image  compose  (-compose)  method.  Image content
1846              which falls outside the bounds of the new  image  dimensions  is
1847              discarded.
1848
1849              For  example,  this command creates a thumbnail of an image, and
1850              centers it on a red color backdrop image, offsetting the  canvas
1851              ten  pixels  to the left and five pixels up, with respect to the
1852              thumbnail:
1853
1854                  gm convert  infile.jpg  -thumbnail  120x80  -background  red
1855              -gravity center \
1856                            -extent 140x100-10-5 outfile.jpg
1857
1858
1859              This  command  reduces  or  expands  a  JPEG  image to fit on an
1860              800x600 display:
1861
1862                  gm convert -size 800x600 input.jpg \
1863                            -resize 800x600 -background black \
1864                            -compose Copy -gravity center \
1865                            -extent 800x600 \
1866                            -quality 92 output.jpg
1867
1868
1869              If the aspect ratio of the input image isn't exactly  4:3,  then
1870              the image is centered on an 800x600 black canvas.
1871
1872       -file <filename>
1873              write annotated difference image to file
1874
1875              If  -file  is  specified,  then an annotated difference image is
1876              generated and written to the specified file. Pixels which differ
1877              between the reference and compare images are modified from those
1878              in the compare image so that  the  changed  pixels  become  more
1879              obvious.   Some  images  may require use of an alternative high‐
1880              light style  (see  -highlight-style)  or  highlight  color  (see
1881              -highlight-color) before the changes are obvious.
1882
1883       -fill <color>
1884              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
1885
1886              Colors  are  represented in GraphicsMagick in the same form used
1887              by SVG. Use "gm convert -list color" to list named colors:
1888
1889                  name               (named color)
1890                  #RGB               (hex numbers, 4 bits each)
1891                  #RRGGBB            (8 bits each)
1892                  #RRRGGGBBB         (12 bits each)
1893                  #RRRRGGGGBBBB      (16 bits each)
1894                  #RGBA              (4 bits each)
1895                  #RRGGBBAA          (8 bits each)
1896                  #RRRGGGBBBAAA      (12 bits each)
1897                  #RRRRGGGGBBBBAAAA  (16 bits each)
1898                  rgb(r,g,b)         (r,g,b are decimal numbers)
1899                  rgba(r,g,b,a)      (r,g,b,a are decimal numbers)
1900
1901
1902              Enclose the color specification in quotation  marks  to  prevent
1903              the "#" or the parentheses from being interpreted by your shell.
1904
1905              For example,
1906
1907                  gm convert -fill blue ...
1908                  gm convert -fill "#ddddff" ...
1909                  gm convert -fill "rgb(65000,65000,65535)" ...
1910
1911
1912              The  shorter  forms  are scaled up, if necessary by replication.
1913              For example, #3af, #33aaff, and #3333aaaaffff  are  all  equiva‐
1914              lent.
1915
1916              See -draw for further details.
1917
1918       -filter <type>
1919              use this type of filter when resizing an image
1920
1921              Use  this  option  to  affect the resizing operation of an image
1922              (see -geometry).  Choose from these filters (ordered by approxi‐
1923              mate increasing CPU time):
1924
1925                   Point
1926                   Box
1927                   Triangle
1928                   Hermite
1929                   Hanning
1930                   Hamming
1931                   Blackman
1932                   Gaussian
1933                   Quadratic
1934                   Cubic
1935                   Catrom
1936                   Mitchell
1937                   Lanczos
1938                   Bessel
1939                   Sinc
1940
1941
1942              The default filter is automatically selected to provide the best
1943              quality  while  consuming  a  reasonable  amount  of  time.  The
1944              Mitchell  filter  is  used if the image supports a palette, sup‐
1945              ports a matte channel, or is being enlarged, otherwise the Lanc‐
1946              zos filter is used.
1947
1948       -flatten
1949              flatten a sequence of images
1950
1951              In  some  file formats (e.g. Photoshop's PSD) complex images may
1952              be represented by "layers" (independent images)  which  must  be
1953              composited in order to obtain the final rendition.  The -flatten
1954              option accomplishes this composition.  The sequence of images is
1955              replaced  by a single image created by compositing each image in
1956              turn, while respecting composition operators and  page  offsets.
1957              While  -flatten is immediately useful for eliminating layers, it
1958              is also useful as a general-purpose composition tool.
1959
1960              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1961              option.   If  the -flatten option appears after all of the input
1962              images, all images are flattened.  Also  see  -mosaic  which  is
1963              similar  to -flatten except that it adds a suitably-sized canvas
1964              base image.
1965
1966              For example, this composites an image on top of a 640x400 trans‐
1967              parent black canvas image:
1968
1969                  gm convert -size 640x300 xc:transparent \
1970                            -compose over -page +0-100 \
1971                            frame.png -flatten output.png
1972
1973
1974              and this flattens a Photoshop PSD file:
1975
1976                  gm convert input.psd -flatten output.png
1977
1978
1979       -flip  create a "mirror image"
1980
1981              reflect the scanlines in the vertical direction.
1982
1983       -flop  create a "mirror image"
1984
1985              reflect the scanlines in the horizontal direction.
1986
1987       -font <name>
1988              use this font when annotating the image with text
1989
1990              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
1991              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Arial.ttf is a  TrueType  font,
1992              ps:helvetica is PostScript, and x:fixed is X11.
1993
1994       -foreground <color>
1995              define the foreground color
1996
1997              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
1998              -fill option.
1999
2000       -format <type>
2001              the image format type
2002
2003              When used with the mogrify utility, this option will convert any
2004              image  to  the  image format you specify.  See GraphicsMagick(1)
2005              for a list of image format types supported by GraphicsMagick, or
2006              see the output of 'gm -list format'.
2007
2008              By  default  the file is written to its original name.  However,
2009              if the filename extension matches a supported format, the exten‐
2010              sion is replaced with the image format type specified with -for‐
2011              mat.  For example, if you specify tiff as the  format  type  and
2012              the input image filename is image.gif, the output image filename
2013              becomes image.tiff.
2014
2015       -format <string>
2016              output formatted image characteristics
2017
2018              When used with the identify utility, or the convert utility with
2019              output  written  to  the  'info:-'  file specification, use this
2020              option to print information about the image in a format of  your
2021              choosing.   You  can  include  the  image filename, type, width,
2022              height, Exif data, or other image attributes by  embedding  spe‐
2023              cial format characters:
2024
2025                   %b   file size
2026                   %c   comment
2027                   %d   directory
2028                   %e   filename extension
2029                   %f   filename
2030                   %g   page dimensions and offsets
2031                   %h   height
2032                   %i   input filename
2033                   %k   number of unique colors
2034                   %l   label
2035                   %m   magick
2036                   %n   number of scenes
2037                   %o   output filename
2038                   %p   page number
2039                   %q   image bit depth
2040                   %r   image type description
2041                   %s   scene number
2042                   %t   top of filename
2043                   %u   unique temporary filename
2044                   %w   width
2045                   %x   horizontal resolution
2046                   %y   vertical resolution
2047                   %A   transparency supported
2048                   %C   compression type
2049                   %D   GIF disposal method
2050                   %G   Original width and height
2051                   %H   page height
2052                   %M   original filename specification
2053                   %O   page offset (x,y)
2054                   %P   page dimensions (width,height)
2055                   %Q   compression quality
2056                   %T   time delay (in centi-seconds)
2057                   %U   resolution units
2058                   %W   page width
2059                   %X   page horizontal offset (x)
2060                   %Y   page vertical offset (y)
2061                   %@   trim bounding box
2062                   %#   signature
2063                   \n   newline
2064                   \r   carriage return
2065                   %%   %
2066
2067
2068              For example,
2069
2070                   -format "%m:%f %wx%h"
2071
2072
2073              displays  MIFF:bird.miff  512x480  for an image titled bird.miff
2074              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2075
2076              If the first character of string is @, the format is read from a
2077              file  titled  by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
2078              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source  that  it
2079              should  be sanitized before use since this may be used to incor‐
2080              porate any readable file on the system (a security risk).
2081
2082              The values of image type (%r) which may be returned include:
2083
2084                   Bilevel
2085                   Grayscale
2086                   GrayscaleMatte
2087                   Palette
2088                   PaletteMatte
2089                   TrueColor
2090                   TrueColorMatte
2091                   ColorSeparation
2092                   ColorSeparationMatte
2093                   Optimize
2094
2095
2096              You can also use the  following  special  formatting  syntax  to
2097              print Exif information contained in the file:
2098
2099                   %[EXIF:<tag>]
2100
2101
2102              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2103
2104                   *  (print all Exif tags, in keyword=data format)
2105                   !  (print all Exif tags, in tag_number format)
2106                   #hhhh (print data for Exif tag #hhhh)
2107                   ImageWidth
2108                   ImageLength
2109                   BitsPerSample
2110                   Compression
2111                   PhotometricInterpretation
2112                   FillOrder
2113                   DocumentName
2114                   ImageDescription
2115                   Make
2116                   Model
2117                   StripOffsets
2118                   Orientation
2119                   SamplesPerPixel
2120                   RowsPerStrip
2121                   StripByteCounts
2122                   XResolution
2123                   YResolution
2124                   PlanarConfiguration
2125                   ResolutionUnit
2126                   TransferFunction
2127                   Software
2128                   DateTime
2129                   Artist
2130                   WhitePoint
2131                   PrimaryChromaticities
2132                   TransferRange
2133                   JPEGProc
2134                   JPEGInterchangeFormat
2135                   JPEGInterchangeFormatLength
2136                   YCbCrCoefficients
2137                   YCbCrSubSampling
2138                   YCbCrPositioning
2139                   ReferenceBlackWhite
2140                   CFARepeatPatternDim
2141                   CFAPattern
2142                   BatteryLevel
2143                   Copyright
2144                   ExposureTime
2145                   FNumber
2146                   IPTC/NAA
2147                   ExifOffset
2148                   InterColorProfile
2149                   ExposureProgram
2150                   SpectralSensitivity
2151                   GPSInfo
2152                   ISOSpeedRatings
2153                   OECF
2154                   ExifVersion
2155                   DateTimeOriginal
2156                   DateTimeDigitized
2157                   ComponentsConfiguration
2158                   CompressedBitsPerPixel
2159                   ShutterSpeedValue
2160                   ApertureValue
2161                   BrightnessValue
2162                   ExposureBiasValue
2163                   MaxApertureValue
2164                   SubjectDistance
2165                   MeteringMode
2166                   LightSource
2167                   Flash
2168                   FocalLength
2169                   MakerNote
2170                   UserComment
2171                   SubSecTime
2172                   SubSecTimeOriginal
2173                   SubSecTimeDigitized
2174                   FlashPixVersion
2175                   ColorSpace
2176                   ExifImageWidth
2177                   ExifImageLength
2178                   InteroperabilityOffset
2179                   FlashEnergy
2180                   SpatialFrequencyResponse
2181                   FocalPlaneXResolution
2182                   FocalPlaneYResolution
2183                   FocalPlaneResolutionUnit
2184                   SubjectLocation
2185                   ExposureIndex
2186                   SensingMethod
2187                   FileSource
2188                   SceneType
2189
2190
2191              JPEG  specific  information  (from  reading  a JPEG file) may be
2192              obtained like this:
2193
2194                   %[JPEG-<tag>]
2195
2196
2197              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2198
2199                   *                 (all JPEG-related tags, in
2200                                      keyword=data format)
2201                   Quality           IJG JPEG "quality" estimate
2202                   Colorspace        JPEG colorspace numeric ID
2203                   Colorspace-Name   JPEG colorspace name
2204                   Sampling-factors  JPEG sampling factors
2205
2206
2207              Please note that JPEG has no notion of "quality"  and  that  the
2208              quality  metric  used by, and estimated by the software is based
2209              on the  quality  metric  established  by  IJG  JPEG  6b.   Other
2210              encoders  (e.g.  that  used  by  Adobe  Photoshop) use different
2211              encoding metrics.
2212
2213              Surround the format specification with quotation marks  to  pre‐
2214              vent  your  shell  from  misinterpreting  any  spaces and square
2215              brackets.
2216
2217       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
2218              surround the image with an ornamental border
2219
2220              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.  The
2221              -frame option is not affected by the -gravity option.
2222
2223              The  color  of the border is specified with the -mattecolor com‐
2224              mand line option.
2225
2226       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
2227
2228       -fuzz <distance>{%}
2229              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
2230
2231              A number of algorithms search for a target color. By default the
2232              color  must  be  exact. Use this option to match colors that are
2233              close (in Euclidean distance) to the  target  color  in  RGB  3D
2234              space.  For example, if you want to automatically trim the edges
2235              of an image with -trim but the image was scanned and the  target
2236              background  color  may differ by a small amount. This option can
2237              account for these differences.
2238
2239              The distance can be in absolute intensity units or, by appending
2240              "%",  as  a  percentage  of the maximum possible intensity (255,
2241              65535, or 4294967295).
2242
2243       -gamma <value>
2244              level of gamma correction
2245
2246              The same color image displayed on two different workstations may
2247              look  different  due  to differences in the display monitor. Use
2248              gamma correction to adjust for this color difference. Reasonable
2249              values  extend  from 0.8 to 2.3. Gamma less than 1.0 darkens the
2250              image and gamma greater than 1.0 lightens it. Large  adjustments
2251              to  image gamma may result in the loss of some image information
2252              if the pixel quantum size is only eight bits (quantum range 0 to
2253              255).
2254
2255              You  can apply separate gamma values to the red, green, and blue
2256              channels of the image with a gamma  value  list  delimited  with
2257              slashes (e.g., 1.7/2.3/1.2).
2258
2259              Use  +gamma  value to set the image gamma level without actually
2260              adjusting the image pixels. This option is useful if  the  image
2261              is  of a known gamma but not set as an image attribute (e.g. PNG
2262              images).
2263
2264       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
2265              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
2266
2267              Use the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
2268
2269       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
2270              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
2271
2272              The -geometry option is used for a number of different purposes,
2273              depending on the utility it is used with.
2274
2275              For  the  X11  commands ('animate', 'display', and 'import'), it
2276              specifies the preferred size and location of the  Image  window.
2277              By  default,  the window size is the image size and the location
2278              is chosen by you (or your window manager) when it is mapped.
2279               For the 'import', 'convert', 'mogrify' utility commands it  may
2280              be  used to specify the desired size when resizing an image.  In
2281              this case, symbols representing resize options may  be  appended
2282              to  the  geometry  string to influence how the resize request is
2283              treated.
2284
2285              See later notes corresponding to usage by  particular  commands.
2286              The following notes apply to when -geometry is used to express a
2287              resize request, taking into account the  current  properties  of
2288              the image.
2289
2290              By  default,  the  width and height are maximum values. That is,
2291              the image is expanded or contracted to fit the width and  height
2292              value while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
2293
2294              Append  a  ^  to  the geometry so that the image aspect ratio is
2295              maintained when the image is resized, but the resulting width or
2296              height are treated as minimum values rather than maximum values.
2297
2298              Append  a  !  (exclamation  point)  to the geometry to force the
2299              image size to exactly the size you specify. For example, if  you
2300              specify 640x480! the image width is set to 640 pixels and height
2301              to 480.
2302
2303              If only the width is specified, without the trailing  'x',  then
2304              height  is  set  to  width  (e.g.,  -geometry 100 is the same as
2305              -geometry 100x100).  If only the width is specified but with the
2306              trailing  'x',  then  width  assumes the value and the height is
2307              chosen to maintain the aspect ratio of the image.  Similarly, if
2308              only  the  height  is specified prefixed by 'x' (e.g., -geometry
2309              x256), the width is chosen to maintain the aspect ratio.
2310
2311              To specify a percentage width or height instead, append  %.  The
2312              image  size is multiplied by the width and height percentages to
2313              obtain the final image dimensions. To increase the  size  of  an
2314              image,  use a value greater than 100 (e.g. 125%). To decrease an
2315              image's size, use a percentage less than 100.
2316
2317              Use @ to specify the maximum area in pixels of an image.
2318
2319              Use > to change the dimensions of the image only if its width or
2320              height  exceeds  the geometry specification. < resizes the image
2321              only if both of its dimensions are less than the geometry speci‐
2322              fication.  For  example, if you specify '640x480>' and the image
2323              size is 256x256, the image size does not change. However, if the
2324              image  is  512x512  or  1024x1024,  it  is  resized  to 480x480.
2325              Enclose the geometry specification in quotation marks to prevent
2326              the  < or > from being interpreted by your shell as a file redi‐
2327              rection.
2328
2329              When used with animate and display, offsets are handled  in  the
2330              same  manner as in X(1) and the -gravity option is not used.  If
2331              the x is negative, the offset  is  measured  leftward  from  the
2332              right  edge  of  the screen to the right edge of the image being
2333              displayed.  Similarly, negative y is measured between the bottom
2334              edges.   The  offsets  are  not affected by "%"; they are always
2335              measured in pixels.
2336
2337              When used as a composite option, -geometry gives the  dimensions
2338              of  the  image  and  its  location with respect to the composite
2339              image.  If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast,  East,
2340              or  SouthEast  gravity,  the  x represents the distance from the
2341              right edge of the image to  the  right  edge  of  the  composite
2342              image.  Similarly, if the -gravity option is present with South‐
2343              West, South, or SouthEast gravity, y  is  measured  between  the
2344              bottom edges. Accordingly, a positive offset will never point in
2345              the direction  outside  of  the  image.   The  offsets  are  not
2346              affected by "%"; they are always measured in pixels.  To specify
2347              the dimensions of the composite image, use the -resize option.
2348
2349              When used as a convert, import or mogrify option,  -geometry  is
2350              synonymous  with  -resize  and  specifies the size of the output
2351              image.  The offsets, if present, are ignored.
2352
2353              When used as a montage option,  -geometry  specifies  the  image
2354              size  and  border  size  for  each tile; default is 256x256+0+0.
2355              Negative  offsets  (border  dimensions)  are  meaningless.   The
2356              -gravity  option  affects  the placement of the image within the
2357              tile; the default gravity for this purpose is  Center.   If  the
2358              "%" sign appears in the geometry specification, the tile size is
2359              the specified percentage of the original dimensions of the first
2360              tile.  To specify the dimensions of the montage, use the -resize
2361              option.
2362
2363       -gravity <type>
2364              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
2365
2366              Choices are: NorthWest, North, NorthEast,  West,  Center,  East,
2367              SouthWest, South, SouthEast.
2368
2369              The  direction  you  choose specifies where to position the text
2370              when annotating the image. For example Center gravity forces the
2371              text  to  be  centered  within  the image. By default, the image
2372              gravity is NorthWest.  See -draw for more details about  graphic
2373              primitives.  Only the text primitive is affected by the -gravity
2374              option.
2375
2376              The -gravity option is also used in concert with  the  -geometry
2377              option  and  other  options that take <geometry> as a parameter,
2378              such as the -crop option.  See -geometry for details of how  the
2379              -gravity  option  interacts with the <x> and <y> parameters of a
2380              geometry specification.
2381
2382              When used as an option to composite, -gravity gives  the  direc‐
2383              tion that the image gravitates within the composite.
2384
2385              When  used as an option to montage, -gravity gives the direction
2386              that an image gravitates within a tile.  The default gravity  is
2387              Center for this purpose.
2388
2389       -green-primary <x>,<y>
2390              green chromaticity primary point
2391
2392       -hald-clut <clut>
2393              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
2394
2395              A  Hald  CLUT  ("Color Look-Up Table") is a special square color
2396              image which contains a look-up table for red, green,  and  blue.
2397              The size of the Hald CLUT image is determined by its order.  The
2398              width (and height) of a Hald CLUT is the cube of the order.  For
2399              example,  a Hald CLUT of order 8 is 512x512 pixels (262,144 col‐
2400              ors) and of order 16 is 4096x4096 (16,777,216 colors).   A  spe‐
2401              cial  CLUT  is the identity CLUT which which causes no change to
2402              the input image.  In order to use the Hald CLUT,  one  takes  an
2403              identity  CLUT and adjusts its colors in some way.  The modified
2404              CLUT can then be used to transform any number of  images  in  an
2405              identical way.
2406
2407              GraphicsMagick  contains  a built-in identity CLUT generator via
2408              the IDENTITY coder.  For example  reading  from  the  file  name
2409              IDENTITY:8  returns  an  identity CLUT of order 8.  Typical Hald
2410              CLUT identity images have an order of between  8  and  16.   The
2411              default  order for the IDENTITY CLUT generator is 8.  Interpola‐
2412              tion is used so it is not usually necessary for CLUT  images  to
2413              be  very  large.   The PNG file format is ideal for storing Hald
2414              CLUT images because it compresses them very well.
2415
2416       -help  print usage instructions
2417
2418       -highlight-color <color>
2419              pixel annotation color
2420
2421              Specifies the color to use when annotating difference pixels.
2422
2423       -highlight-style <style>
2424              pixel annotation style
2425
2426              Specifies the pixel difference annotation  style  used  to  draw
2427              attention  to  changed  pixels. May be one of Assign, Threshold,
2428              Tint, or XOR; where Assign replaces the pixel with the highlight
2429              color  (see -highlight-color), Threshold replaces the pixel with
2430              black or white based on the difference in intensity, Tint  alpha
2431              tints  the  pixel  with the highlight color, and XOR does an XOR
2432              between the pixel and the highlight color.
2433
2434       -iconGeometry <geometry>
2435              specify the icon geometry
2436
2437              Offsets, if present in the geometry specification,  are  handled
2438              in  the  same manner as the -geometry option, using X11 style to
2439              handle negative offsets.
2440
2441       -iconic
2442              iconic animation
2443
2444       -immutable
2445              make image immutable
2446
2447       -implode <factor>
2448              implode image pixels about the center
2449
2450       -intent <type>
2451              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
2452
2453              Use this option to affect the the color management operation  of
2454              an  image  (see -profile).  Choose from these intents: Absolute,
2455              Perceptual, Relative, Saturation.
2456
2457              The default intent is undefined.
2458
2459       -interlace <type>
2460              the type of interlacing scheme
2461
2462              Choices are: None, Line, Plane, or  Partition.  The  default  is
2463              None.
2464
2465              This  option  is  used to specify the type of interlacing scheme
2466              for raw image formats such as RGB or YUV.   None  means  do  not
2467              interlace (RGBRGBRGBRGBRGBRGB...),
2468
2469              Line             uses            scanline            interlacing
2470              (RRR...GGG...BBB...RRR...GGG...BBB...),  and  Plane  uses  plane
2471              interlacing (RRRRRR...GGGGGG...BBBBBB...).
2472
2473              Partition is like plane except the different planes are saved to
2474              individual files (e.g. image.R, image.G, and image.B).
2475
2476              Use Line to create an interlaced PNG or  GIF or progressive JPEG
2477              image.
2478
2479       -label <name>
2480              assign a label to an image
2481
2482              Use  this  option  to assign a specific label to the image, when
2483              writing to an image format that supports labels, such  as  TIFF,
2484              PNG,  MIFF,  or  PostScript. You can include the the image file‐
2485              name, type, width, height, or other image attribute by embedding
2486              special  format  character.   A label is not drawn on the image,
2487              but is embedded in the image datastream via  a  "Label"  tag  or
2488              similar  mechanism.   If you want the label to be visible on the
2489              image itself, use the -draw option.  See -comment for details.
2490
2491              For example,
2492
2493                   -label "%m:%f %wx%h"
2494
2495
2496              produces an image label of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for  an  image
2497              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2498
2499              If  the  first character of string is @, the image label is read
2500              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
2501              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
2502              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
2503              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file might be incorporated into
2504              the image label (a security risk).
2505
2506              If the -label option appears multiple times, only the last label
2507              is stored.
2508
2509              In  PNG images, the label is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk with
2510              the keyword "label".
2511
2512              When converting to PostScript, use  this  option  to  specify  a
2513              header  string  to print above the image. Specify the label font
2514              with -font.
2515
2516              When creating a montage, by default the label associated with an
2517              image  is  displayed with the corresponding tile in the montage.
2518              Use the +label option to suppress this behavior.
2519
2520
2521
2522       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
2523              perform local adaptive thresholding
2524
2525              Perform local adaptive thresholding using the  specified  width,
2526              height,  and  offset.   The offset is a distance in sample space
2527              from the mean, as an absolute integer ranging from 0 to the max‐
2528              imum  sample value or as a percentage.  If the percent option is
2529              supplied, then the offset is computed as  a  percentage  of  the
2530              quantum  range.   It  is strongly recommended to use the percent
2531              option so that results are not sensitive to pixel quantum depth.
2532
2533              For example,
2534
2535                   -colorspace gray -lat "10x10-5%"
2536
2537
2538              will help clarify a scanned grayscale or color document, produc‐
2539              ing a bi-level equivalent.
2540
2541       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
2542              adjust the level of image contrast
2543
2544              Give  one,  two  or  three  values delimited with commas: black-
2545              point, gamma, white-point (e.g. 10,1.0,250 or  2%,0.5,98%).  The
2546              black and white points range from 0 to MaxRGB or from 0 to 100%;
2547              if the white point is omitted it is set  to  MaxRGB-black_point.
2548              If  a  "%" sign is present anywhere in the string, the black and
2549              white points are percentages of MaxRGB.  Gamma  is  an  exponent
2550              that  ranges  from  0.1 to 10.; if it is omitted, the default of
2551              1.0 (no gamma correction) is assumed. This interface works simi‐
2552              lar  to Photoshop's "Image->Adjustments->Levels..."  "Input Lev‐
2553              els" interface.
2554
2555       -limit <type> <value>
2556              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
2557              resource limit
2558
2559              By default, resource limits are estimated based on the available
2560              resources of the system. The resource limits are  Disk,  maximum
2561              total disk space consumed; File, maximum number of file descrip‐
2562              tors allowed to be open at once; Map, maximum  total  number  of
2563              file  bytes  which  may  be memory mapped; Memory, maximum total
2564              number of bytes of heap memory used for image  storage;  Pixels,
2565              maximum  absolute  image  size (per image); Width, maximum image
2566              pixels width; Height, maximum image pixels height; and  Threads,
2567              the  maximum  number  of worker threads to use per OpenMP thread
2568              team.
2569
2570              These resource limits are used to decide if (for a given  image)
2571              the  decoded image ("pixel cache") should be stored in heap mem‐
2572              ory (RAM), in a memory-mapped disk  file,  or  in  a  disk  file
2573              accessed  via read/write I/O.  The number of total pixels in one
2574              image, and/or the width/height, may also be limited in order  to
2575              force  the  reading, or creation of images larger than the limit
2576              (in pixels) to intentionally fail. The disk limit establishes an
2577              overall  limit since using the disk is the means of last resort.
2578              When the disk limit has been reached,  no  more  images  may  be
2579              read.
2580
2581              The  value  argument is an absolute value, but may have standard
2582              binary suffix characters applied ('K', 'M', 'G', 'T', 'P',  'E')
2583              to apply a scaling to the value (based on a multiplier of 1024).
2584              Any additional characters are ignored. For example, '-limit Pix‐
2585              els  10MP'  limits  the  maximum image size to 10 megapixels and
2586              '-limit memory 32MB -limit map 64MB' limits  memory  and  memory
2587              mapped files to 32 megabytes and 64 megabytes respectively.
2588
2589              Resource limits may also be set using environment variables. The
2590              environment  variables  MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK,   MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES,
2591              MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP, MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY, MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS, MAG‐
2592              ICK_LIMIT_WIDTH, MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT,and OMP_NUM_THREADS may  be
2593              used to set the limits for disk space, open files, memory mapped
2594              size, heap memory, per-image pixels, image width, image  height,
2595              and threads respectively.
2596
2597              Use the option -list resource list the current limits.
2598
2599       -linewidth
2600              the line width for subsequent draw operations
2601
2602       -list <type>
2603              the type of list
2604
2605              Choices  are:  Color, Delegate, Format, Magic, Module, Resource,
2606              or Type. The Module option is only available  if  GraphicsMagick
2607              was built to support loadable modules.
2608
2609              This  option lists information about the GraphicsMagick configu‐
2610              ration.
2611
2612       -log <string>
2613              Specify format for debug log
2614
2615              This option specifies the format for the log  printed  when  the
2616              -debug option is active.
2617
2618              You  can  display  the following components by embedding special
2619              format characters:
2620
2621                   %d   domain
2622                   %e   event
2623                   %f   function
2624                   %l   line
2625                   %m   module
2626                   %p   process ID
2627                   %r   real CPU time
2628                   %t   wall clock time
2629                   %u   user CPU time
2630                   %%   percent sign
2631                   \n   newline
2632                   \r   carriage return
2633
2634
2635              For example:
2636
2637                  gm convert -debug coders -log "%u %m:%l %e" in.gif out.png
2638
2639
2640              The default behavior is to print all of the components.
2641
2642       -loop <iterations>
2643              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
2644
2645              A value other than zero forces the animation to repeat itself up
2646              to iterations times.
2647
2648       -magnify
2649              magnify the image
2650
2651              The image size is doubled using linear interpolation.
2652
2653       -magnify <factor>
2654              magnify the image
2655
2656              The displayed image is magnified by factor.
2657
2658       -map <filename>
2659              choose a particular set of colors from this image
2660
2661              [convert or mogrify]
2662
2663              By  default,  color  reduction  chooses an optimal set of colors
2664              that best represent the original image. Alternatively,  you  can
2665              choose  a  particular set of colors from an image file with this
2666              option.
2667
2668              Use +map to reduce all images in the image sequence that follows
2669              to  a  single  optimal set of colors that best represent all the
2670              images.  The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance
2671              of  any  option.   If  the  +map option appears after all of the
2672              input images, all images are mapped.
2673
2674       -map <type>
2675              display image using this type.
2676
2677              [animate or display]
2678
2679              Choose from these Standard Colormap types:
2680
2681                   best
2682                   default
2683                   gray
2684                   red
2685                   green
2686                   blue
2687
2688
2689              The X server must support the Standard Colormap you choose, oth‐
2690              erwise  an  error  occurs.  Use  list  as  the  type and display
2691              searches the list of colormap types in top-to-bottom order until
2692              one is located. See xstdcmap(1) for one way of creating Standard
2693              Colormaps.
2694
2695       -mask <filename>
2696              Specify a clipping mask
2697
2698              The image read from the file is used as  a  clipping  mask.   It
2699              must have the same dimensions as the image being masked.
2700
2701              If  the  mask  image contains an opacity channel, the opacity of
2702              each pixel is used to define the mask.  Otherwise, the intensity
2703              (gray level) of each pixel is used.  Unmasked (black) pixels are
2704              modified while masked pixels  (not  black)  are  protected  from
2705              alteration.
2706
2707              Use +mask to remove the clipping mask.
2708
2709              It  is not necessary to use -clip to activate the mask; -clip is
2710              implied by -mask.
2711
2712       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
2713
2714              If the image does not have a matte  channel,  create  an  opaque
2715              one.
2716
2717              Use  +matte  to  ignore the matte channel and to avoid writing a
2718              matte channel in the output file.
2719
2720       -mattecolor <color>
2721              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
2722
2723              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
2724              -fill option.
2725
2726       -maximum-error <limit>
2727              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
2728
2729              Specifies the maximum amount of total image error (based on com‐
2730              parison using a specified metric) before an error  ("image  dif‐
2731              ference  exceeds limit") is reported.  The error is reported via
2732              a non-zero command execution return status.
2733
2734       -median <radius>
2735              apply a median filter to the image
2736
2737       -metric <metric>
2738              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
2739
2740       -minify <factor>
2741              minify the image
2742
2743              The image size is halved using linear interpolation.
2744
2745       -mode <value>
2746              mode of operation
2747
2748              The available montage modes are frame to place the images  in  a
2749              rectangular  grid  while  adding  a  decorative frame with drop‐
2750              shadow, unframe to place undecorated  images  in  a  rectangular
2751              grid,  and concatenate to pack the images closely together with‐
2752              out any well-defined grid or decoration.
2753
2754       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
2755              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
2756
2757              Specify the percent change in brightness, color saturation,  and
2758              hue  separated  by  commas. Default argument values are 100 per‐
2759              cent, resulting in no change. For example, to increase the color
2760              brightness  by  20% and decrease the color saturation by 10% and
2761              leave the hue unchanged, use: -modulate 120,90.
2762
2763              Hue is the percentage of  absolute  rotation  from  the  current
2764              position. For example 50 results in a counter-clockwise rotation
2765              of 90 degrees,  150  results  in  a  clockwise  rotation  of  90
2766              degrees,  with  0  and  200  both resulting in a rotation of 180
2767              degrees.
2768
2769       -monitor
2770              show progress indication
2771
2772              A simple command-line progress indication  is  shown  while  the
2773              command  is  running. The process indication shows the operation
2774              currently being performed and the  percent  completed.  Commands
2775              using  X11 may replace the command line progress indication with
2776              a graphical one once an image has been displayed.
2777
2778       -monochrome
2779              transform the image to black and white
2780
2781       -morph <frames>
2782              morphs an image sequence
2783
2784              Both the image pixels and size are linearly interpolated to give
2785              the appearance of a meta-morphosis from one image to the next.
2786
2787              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
2788              option.  If the -morph option appears after  all  of  the  input
2789              images, all images are morphed.
2790
2791       -mosaic
2792              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
2793
2794              The  -mosaic  option provides a flexible way to composite one or
2795              more images onto a solid-color canvas image. It works similar to
2796              -flatten  except  that a base canvas image is automatically cre‐
2797              ated with a suitable size given the image size, page dimensions,
2798              and  page  offsets of images to be composited.  The color of the
2799              base canvas image may be set via the  -background  option.   The
2800              default  canvas  color  is 'white', but 'black' or 'transparent'
2801              may be more suitable  depending  on  the  composition  algorithm
2802              requested.
2803
2804              The -compose option may be used to specify the composition algo‐
2805              rithm to use when compositing the subsequent image on  the  base
2806              canvas.
2807
2808              The  -page option can be used to establish the dimensions of the
2809              mosaic and to position the subsequent image within  the  mosaic.
2810              If  the  -page  argument does not specify width and height, then
2811              the canvas dimensions are evaluated based on the image sizes and
2812              offsets.
2813
2814              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
2815              option.  If the -mosaic option appears after all  of  the  input
2816              images, all images are included in the mosaic.
2817
2818              The  following is an example of composing an image based on red,
2819              green, and blue layers extracted from a sequence of  images  and
2820              pasted on the canvas image at specified offsets:
2821
2822                  gm convert -background black \
2823                            -compose CopyRed   -page +0-100 red.png \
2824                            -compose CopyGreen -page +0+40  green.png \
2825                            -compose CopyBlue  -page +0+180 blue.png \
2826                            -mosaic output.png
2827
2828
2829       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
2830              Simulate motion blur
2831
2832              Simulate  motion  blur  by  convolving the image with a Gaussian
2833              operator of the given radius and standard deviation (sigma). For
2834              reasonable  results,  radius  should  be  larger  than sigma. If
2835              radius is zero, then a suitable radius is automatically selected
2836              based on sigma. The angle specifies the angle that the object is
2837              coming from (side which is blurred).
2838
2839       -name  name an image
2840
2841       -negate
2842              replace every pixel with its complementary color
2843
2844              The red, green, and blue intensities of an  image  are  negated.
2845              White  becomes  black, yellow becomes blue, etc.  Use +negate to
2846              only negate the grayscale pixels of the image.
2847
2848       -noise <radius|type>
2849              add or reduce noise in an image
2850
2851              The principal function of noise peak elimination  filter  is  to
2852              smooth  the objects within an image without losing edge informa‐
2853              tion and without creating undesired structures. The central idea
2854              of the algorithm is to replace a pixel with its next neighbor in
2855              value within a pixel window, if this pixel has been found to  be
2856              noise.  A pixel is defined as noise if and only if this pixel is
2857              a maximum or minimum within the pixel window.
2858
2859              Use radius to specify the width of the neighborhood.
2860
2861              Use +noise followed by a noise type to add noise  to  an  image.
2862              The noise added modulates the existing image pixels. Choose from
2863              these noise types:
2864
2865                   Uniform
2866                   Gaussian
2867                   Multiplicative
2868                   Impulse
2869                   Laplacian
2870                   Poisson
2871                   Random (uniform distribution)
2872
2873
2874       -noop  NOOP (no option)
2875
2876              The -noop option can be used to terminate a group of images  and
2877              reset  all options to their default values, when no other option
2878              is desired.
2879
2880       -normalize
2881              transform image to span the full range of color values
2882
2883              This is a contrast enhancement technique based on the image his‐
2884              togram.
2885
2886              When  computing  the  contrast enhancement values, the histogram
2887              edges are truncated so that the majority of the image pixels are
2888              considered in the constrast enhancement, and outliers (e.g. ran‐
2889              dom noise or minute details) are ignored.  The default  is  that
2890              0.1  percent of the histogram entries are ignored.  The percent‐
2891              age of the histogram to ignore may be  specified  by  using  the
2892              -set  option  with  the histogram-threshold parameter similar to
2893              -set histogram-threshold 0.01 to specify 0.01  percent.   Use  0
2894              percent  to  use  the entire histogram, with possibly diminished
2895              contrast enhancement.
2896
2897       -opaque <color>
2898              change this color to the pen color within the image
2899
2900              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
2901              -fill  option.   The color is replaced if it is identical to the
2902              target color, or close enough to the target color in a 3D  space
2903              as defined by the Euclidean distance specified by -fuzz.
2904
2905              See -fill and -fuzz for more details.
2906
2907       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
2908              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
2909              channel
2910
2911              Apply a low-level mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to  a
2912              selected  image  channel or all image channels. Operations which
2913              result in negative results are reset  to  zero,  and  operations
2914              which overflow the available range are reset to the maximum pos‐
2915              sible value.
2916
2917              Select a channel from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity,  Matte,  Cyan,
2918              Magenta,  Yellow,  Black,  All,  or  Gray. All only modifies the
2919              color channels and does not modify the Opacity  channel.  Except
2920              for  the threshold operators, All operates on each channel inde‐
2921              pendently so that operations are on a per-channel basis.
2922
2923              Gray treats the color channels as a grayscale intensity and per‐
2924              forms  the requested operation on the equivalent pixel intensity
2925              so the result is a gray image.  Select  an  operator  from  Add,
2926              And,  Assign,  Depth,  Divide,  Gamma, Negate, LShift, Log, Max,
2927              Min, Multiply, Or, Pow RShift, Subtract,  Threshold,  Threshold-
2928              White, Threshold-White-Negate, Threshold-Black, Threshold-Black-
2929              Negate,  Xor,  Noise-Gaussian,  Noise-Impulse,  Noise-Laplacian,
2930              Noise-Multiplicative,  Noise-Poisson,  Noise-Random,  and Noise-
2931              Uniform.
2932
2933              Rvalue may be any floating  point  or  integer  value.  Normally
2934              rvalue  will be in the range of 0 to MaxRGB, where MaxRGB is the
2935              largest quantum value  supported  by  the  GraphicsMagick  build
2936              (255,  65535,  or  4294967295) but values outside this range are
2937              useful for some arithmetic operations.  Arguments to logical  or
2938              bit-wise  operations  are  rounded  to a positive integral value
2939              prior to use. If a percent (%) symbol is appended to  the  argu‐
2940              ment, then the argument has a range of 0 to 100 percent.
2941
2942              The following is a description of the operators:
2943
2944
2945               Add
2946
2947                    Result is rvalue added to channel value.
2948
2949               And
2950
2951                    Result is the logical AND of rvalue with channel value.
2952
2953               Assign
2954
2955                    Result is rvalue.
2956
2957               Depth
2958
2959                    Result  is  channel  value  adjusted  so  that  it  may be
2960                    (approximately) stored in the  specified  number  of  bits
2961                    without additional loss.
2962
2963               Divide
2964
2965                    Result is channel value divided by rvalue.
2966
2967               Gamma
2968
2969                    Result is channel value gamma adjusted by rvalue.
2970
2971               LShift
2972
2973                    Result  is  channel  value  bitwise left shifted by rvalue
2974                    bits.
2975
2976               Log
2977
2978                    Result is computed as log(value*rvalue+1)/log(rvalue+1).
2979
2980               Max
2981
2982                    Result is assigned to rvalue if  rvalue  is  greater  than
2983                    value.
2984
2985               Min
2986
2987                    Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is less than value.
2988
2989               Multiply
2990
2991                    Result is channel value multiplied by rvalue.
2992
2993               Negate
2994
2995                    Result is inverse of channel value (like a film negative).
2996                    An rvalue must be supplied  but  is  currently  not  used.
2997                    Inverting the image twice results in the original image.
2998
2999               Or
3000
3001                    Result is the logical OR of rvalue with channel value.
3002
3003               Pow
3004
3005                    Result  is computed as pow(value,rvalue). Similar to Gamma
3006                    except that rvalue is not inverted.
3007
3008               RShift
3009
3010                    Result is channel value bitwise right  shifted  by  rvalue
3011                    bits.
3012
3013               Subtract
3014
3015                    Result is channel value minus rvalue.
3016
3017               Threshold
3018
3019                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3020                    rvalue, or minimum (black) if it is less than or equal  to
3021                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3022                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3023
3024               Threshold-white
3025
3026                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3027                    rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is less than or equal to
3028                    rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise from the
3029                    bright  parts  of an image. If all channels are specified,
3030                    then thresholding is done based on computed  pixel  inten‐
3031                    sity.
3032
3033               Threshold-White-Negate
3034
3035                    Result  is  set  to black if channel value is greater than
3036                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is less  than  or  equal  to
3037                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3038                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3039
3040               Threshold-black
3041
3042                    Result is minimum (black) if channel value  is  less  than
3043                    than  rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is greater than or
3044                    equal to rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise
3045                    from the dark parts of an image. If all channels are spec‐
3046                    ified, then thresholding is done based on  computed  pixel
3047                    intensity.
3048
3049               Threshold-Black-Negate
3050
3051                    Result  is set to white if channel value is less than than
3052                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is greater than or equal  to
3053                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3054                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3055
3056               Xor
3057
3058                    Result is the logical XOR of rvalue with channel value. An
3059                    interesting  property  of  XOR is that performing the same
3060                    operation twice results in the original value.
3061
3062               Noise-Gaussian
3063
3064                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  gauss‐
3065                    ian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3066
3067               Noise-Impulse
3068
3069                    Result is the current channel value modulated with impulse
3070                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3071
3072               Noise-Laplacian
3073
3074                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  lapla‐
3075                    cian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3076
3077               Noise-Multiplicative
3078
3079                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with multi‐
3080                    plicative gaussian noise according to the intensity speci‐
3081                    fied by rvalue.
3082
3083               Noise-Poisson
3084
3085                    Result is the current channel value modulated with poisson
3086                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3087
3088               Noise-Random
3089
3090                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  random
3091                    (uniform  distribution)  noise  according to the intensity
3092                    specified  by  rvalue.   The   initial   noise   intensity
3093                    (rvalue=1.0) is the range of one pixel quantum span.
3094
3095               Noise-Uniform
3096
3097                    Result  is  the  channel  value with uniform noise applied
3098                    according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103               As an example, the Assign operator assigns a fixed value  to  a
3104               channel.  For example, this command sets the red channel to the
3105               mid-range value:
3106
3107                   gm convert in.bmp -operator red assign "50%" out.bmp
3108
3109
3110               The following applies 50% thresholding to the image and returns
3111               a gray image:
3112
3113                   gm convert in.bmp -operator gray threshold "50%" out.bmp
3114
3115
3116       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
3117              ordered dither the image
3118
3119              The  channel  or  channels specified in the channeltype argument
3120              are reduced to binary,  using  an  ordered  dither  method.  The
3121              choices  for  channeltype  are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3122              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3123
3124              When channeltype is "All", the color samples are dithered into a
3125              gray level and then that gray level is stored in the three color
3126              channels.  Separately, the opacity channel is  dithered  into  a
3127              bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity channel.
3128
3129              When  channeltype  is  "Intensity",  only  the color samples are
3130              dithered. When channeltype is "opacity"  or  "matte",  only  the
3131              opacity  channel is dithered. When a color channel is specified,
3132              only that channel is dithered.
3133
3134              The choices for N are 2 through 7. The image is divided into NxN
3135              pixel  tiles.   In  each  tile, some or all pixels are turned to
3136              white depending on their intensity.  For each N, (N**2)+1 levels
3137              of gray can be represented.  For N == 2, 3, or 4, the pixels are
3138              turned to white in an order  that  maximizes  dispersion  (i.e.,
3139              reduces  granularity),  while  for  N  ==  5, 6, and 7, they are
3140              turned to white in an order  that  creates  a  roughly  circular
3141              black  blob  in  the  middle of each tile.  An attractive "half-
3142              tone" looking image can be obtained by first rotating the  image
3143              45  degrees,  performing  a  5x5  ordered-dither operation, then
3144              rotating it back to the original orientation and cropping to the
3145              original  image  dimensions.   If  the  original image is gamma-
3146              encoded, it is adviseable to  convert  it  to  linear  intensity
3147              first, e.g., with the "-gamma 0.45455" option.
3148
3149       -output-directory <directory>
3150              output files to directory
3151
3152              Use  -output-directory  to  specify  a  directory under which to
3153              write the output files. Normally mogrify  overwrites  the  input
3154              files, but with this option the output files may be written to a
3155              different directory tree so that the input files are  preserved.
3156              The algorithm used preserves all of the input path specification
3157              in the  output  path  so  that  the  user-specified  input  path
3158              (including  any  sub-directory  part)  is appended to the output
3159              path. If the input file lacks  an  extension,  then  a  suitable
3160              extension  is  automatically added to the output file.  The user
3161              is responsible for creating the output directory specified as an
3162              argument,  but  subdirectories  will be created as needed if the
3163              -create-directories option is supplied.  This option may be used
3164              to  apply  transformations on files from one directory and write
3165              the transformed files to a different directory.  In  conjunction
3166              with  -create-directories,  this  option  is designed to support
3167              transforming whole directory trees of files  provided  that  the
3168              relative  path of the input file is included as part the list of
3169              filenames.
3170
3171       -orient <orientation>
3172              Set the image orientation attribute
3173
3174              Sets the image orientation  attribute.   The  image  orientation
3175              attribute  is  compatible with the TIFF orientation tag (and the
3176              EXIF orientation tag).  Accepted values are undefined,  TopLeft,
3177              TopRight,  BottomRight, BottomLeft, LeftTop, RightTop, RightBot‐
3178              tom, LeftBottom, and hyphenated versions thereof (e.g. left-bot‐
3179              tom).   Please note that GraphicsMagick does not include an EXIF
3180              editor so if an EXIF profile is written to the output image, the
3181              value in the EXIF profile might not match the image.  It is pos‐
3182              sible for an image file to indicate its orientation  in  several
3183              different ways simultaneously.
3184
3185       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
3186              size and location of an image canvas
3187
3188              Use this option to specify the dimensions of the PostScript page
3189              in dots per inch or a TEXT page in pixels.  The  choices  for  a
3190              PostScript page are:
3191
3192                   11x17         792  1224
3193                   Ledger       1224   792
3194                   Legal         612  1008
3195                   Letter        612   792
3196                   LetterSmall   612   792
3197                   ArchE        2592  3456
3198                   ArchD        1728  2592
3199                   ArchC        1296  1728
3200                   ArchB         864  1296
3201                   ArchA         648   864
3202                   A0           2380  3368
3203                   A1           1684  2380
3204                   A2           1190  1684
3205                   A3            842  1190
3206                   A4            595   842
3207                   A4Small       595   842
3208                   A5            421   595
3209                   A6            297   421
3210                   A7            210   297
3211                   A8            148   210
3212                   A9            105   148
3213                   A10            74   105
3214                   B0           2836  4008
3215                   B1           2004  2836
3216                   B2           1418  2004
3217                   B3           1002  1418
3218                   B4            709  1002
3219                   B5            501   709
3220                   C0           2600  3677
3221                   C1           1837  2600
3222                   C2           1298  1837
3223                   C3            918  1298
3224                   C4            649   918
3225                   C5            459   649
3226                   C6            323   459
3227                   Flsa          612   936
3228                   Flse          612   936
3229                   HalfLetter    396   612
3230
3231
3232              For convenience you can specify the page size by media (e.g. A4,
3233              Ledger, etc.). Otherwise,  -page  behaves  much  like  -geometry
3234              (e.g.  -page letter+43+43>).
3235
3236              This  option  is  also used to place subimages when writing to a
3237              multi-image format that supports offsets, such as GIF89 and MNG.
3238              When used for this purpose the offsets are always  measured from
3239              the top left corner of the canvas and are not  affected  by  the
3240              -gravity   option.    To  position  a  GIF  or  MNG  image,  use
3241              -page{+-}<x>{+-}<y> (e.g. -page +100+200).  When  writing  to  a
3242              MNG  file,  a -page option appearing ahead of the first image in
3243              the sequence with nonzero width and height defines the width and
3244              height  values  that  are written in the MHDR chunk.  Otherwise,
3245              the MNG width and height are computed from the bounding box that
3246              contains all images in the sequence.  When writing a GIF89 file,
3247              only the bounding box method is used  to  determine  its  dimen‐
3248              sions.
3249
3250              For  a  PostScript  page, the image is sized as in -geometry and
3251              positioned relative to the lower left hand corner of the page by
3252              {+-}<xoffset>{+-}<y offset>. Use -page 612x792>, for example, to
3253              center the image within the page. If the image size exceeds  the
3254              PostScript  page,  it  is  reduced to fit the page.  The default
3255              gravity for the -page option is NorthWest, i.e., positive x  and
3256              y  offset  are measured rightward and downward from the top left
3257              corner of the page, unless the -gravity option is present with a
3258              value other than NorthWest.
3259
3260              The default page dimensions for a TEXT image is 612x792.
3261
3262              This option is used in concert with -density.
3263
3264              Use +page to remove the page settings for an image.
3265
3266       -paint <radius>
3267              simulate an oil painting
3268
3269              Each  pixel is replaced by the most frequent color in a circular
3270              neighborhood whose width is specified with radius.
3271
3272       -pause <seconds>
3273              pause between animation loops [animate]
3274
3275              Pause for the specified number of seconds before  repeating  the
3276              animation.
3277
3278       -pause <seconds>
3279              pause between snapshots [import]
3280
3281              Pause for the specified number of seconds before taking the next
3282              snapshot.
3283
3284       -pen <color>
3285              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
3286
3287       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
3288
3289              Use this option to disable reading  the  image  pixels  so  that
3290              image  characteristics  such  as  the  image  dimensions  may be
3291              obtained very quickly. For identify, use +ping to force  reading
3292              the  image pixels so that the pixel read rate may be included in
3293              the displayed information.
3294
3295       -pointsize <value>
3296              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
3297
3298       -preview <type>
3299              image preview type
3300
3301              Use this option to affect the  preview  operation  of  an  image
3302              (e.g.    convert  file.png  -preview  Gamma  Preview:gamma.png).
3303              Choose from these previews:
3304
3305                   Rotate
3306                   Shear
3307                   Roll
3308                   Hue
3309                   Saturation
3310                   Brightness
3311                   Gamma
3312                   Spiff
3313                   Dull
3314                   Grayscale
3315                   Quantize
3316                   Despeckle
3317                   ReduceNoise
3318                   AddNoise
3319                   Sharpen
3320                   Blur
3321                   Threshold
3322                   EdgeDetect
3323                   Spread
3324                   Shade
3325                   Raise
3326                   Segment
3327                   Solarize
3328                   Swirl
3329                   Implode
3330                   Wave
3331                   OilPaint
3332                   CharcoalDrawing
3333                   JPEG
3334
3335
3336              The default preview is JPEG.
3337
3338       -process <command>
3339              process a sequence of images using a process module
3340
3341              The command argument has the form module=arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN
3342              where  module  is  the  name of the module to invoke (e.g. "ana‐
3343              lyze") and arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN are an  arbitrary  number  of
3344              arguments to pass to the process module.  The sequence of images
3345              is terminated by the appearance of any option.
3346
3347              If the -process option appears after all of  the  input  images,
3348              all images are processed.
3349
3350       -profile <filename>
3351              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
3352
3353              -profile  filename  adds  an  ICM  (ICC  color management), IPTC
3354              (newswire information), or a generic (including Exif) profile to
3355              the image
3356
3357              Use  +profile  icm,  +profile  iptc, or +profile profile_name to
3358              remove the respective profile.  Multiple profiles may be listed,
3359              separated  by  commas.  Profiles may be excluded from subsequent
3360              listed matches by  preceding  their  name  with  an  exclamation
3361              point.   For  example,  +profile  '!icm,*'  strips  all profiles
3362              except for the ICM profile.  Use identify -verbose to  find  out
3363              what profiles are in the image file.  Use +profile "*" to remove
3364              all profiles.  Writing the image to a format that does not  sup‐
3365              port  profiles  will  of  course  also  cause all profiles to be
3366              removed.  The JPEG and PNG formats will store any profiles  that
3367              have been read and not removed.  In JPEG they are stored in APP1
3368              markers, and in PNG they are stored as hex-coded binary in  com‐
3369              pressed zTXt chunks, except for the iCC chunk which is stored in
3370              the iCCP chunk.
3371
3372              To extract a profile, the -profile option is not used.  Instead,
3373              simply  write  the  file  to an image format such as APP1, 8BIM,
3374              ICM, or IPTC.
3375
3376              For example, to extract the Exif data (which is stored  in  JPEG
3377              files in the APP1 profile), use
3378
3379
3380                  gm convert cockatoo.jpg exifdata.app1
3381
3382              Note  that GraphicsMagick does not attempt to update any profile
3383              to reflect changes made to the image, e.g., rotation  from  por‐
3384              trait  to landscape orientation, so it is possible that the pre‐
3385              served profile may contain invalid data.
3386
3387       -preserve-timestamp
3388              preserve the original timestamps of the file
3389
3390              Use this option to preserve the original modification and access
3391              timestamps of the file, even if it has been modified.
3392
3393       +progress
3394              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
3395
3396              By  default,  when an image is displayed, a progress monitor bar
3397              is shown in the top left corner of  an  existing  image  display
3398              window,  and  the  current  cursor is replaced with an hourglass
3399              cursor. Use +progress to disable the progress monitor  and  busy
3400              cursor during display operations.  While the progress monitor is
3401              disabled for all operations, the busy  cursor  continues  to  be
3402              enabled  for  non-display  operations  such as image processing.
3403              This option is useful for non-interactive display operations, or
3404              when a "clean" look is desired.
3405
3406       -quality <value>
3407              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
3408               For the JPEG and MPEG image formats, quality is 0 (lowest image
3409              quality and highest compression) to 100 (best quality but  least
3410              effective  compression).  The  default  quality  is 75.  Use the
3411              -sampling-factor option to specify the factors for chroma  down‐
3412              sampling.   To  use  the same quality value as that found by the
3413              JPEG decoder, use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3414
3415              For the MIFF image format, and the TIFF format while  using  ZIP
3416              compression,  quality/10 is the zlib compression level, which is
3417              0 (worst but fastest compression) to 9 (best  but  slowest).  It
3418              has  no effect on the image appearance, since the compression is
3419              always lossless.
3420
3421              For the JPEG-2000 image format, quality is mapped using  a  non-
3422              linear  equation to the compression ratio required by the Jasper
3423              library. This non-linear equation is intended to loosely approx‐
3424              imate  the  quality  provided by the JPEG v1 format. The default
3425              quality value 75 results in a request for 16:1 compression.  The
3426              quality  value  100  results in a request for non-lossy compres‐
3427              sion.
3428
3429              For the MNG and PNG image formats, the quality  value  sets  the
3430              zlib compression level (quality / 10) and filter-type (quality %
3431              10). Compression levels range from 0  (fastest  compression)  to
3432              100  (best  but  slowest). For compression level 0, the Huffman-
3433              only strategy is used, which is fastest but not necessarily  the
3434              worst compression.
3435
3436              If  filter-type  is 4 or less, the specified filter-type is used
3437              for all scanlines:
3438
3439                   0: none
3440                   1: sub
3441                   2: up
3442                   3: average
3443                   4: Paeth
3444
3445
3446              If filter-type is 5, adaptive filtering is used when quality  is
3447              greater  than 50 and the image does not have a color map, other‐
3448              wise no filtering is used.
3449
3450              If filter-type is 6,  adaptive  filtering  with  minimum-sum-of-
3451              absolute-values is used.
3452
3453              Only  if  the output is MNG, if filter-type is 7, the LOCO color
3454              transformation and adaptive filtering with  minimum-sum-of-abso‐
3455              lute-values are used.
3456
3457              The  default  is quality is 75, which means nearly the best com‐
3458              pression with adaptive filtering.  The quality  setting  has  no
3459              effect  on  the appearance of PNG and MNG images, since the com‐
3460              pression is always lossless.
3461
3462              For further information, see the PNG specification.
3463
3464              When writing a JNG image with transparency, two  quality  values
3465              are  required,  one for the main image and one for the grayscale
3466              image that conveys the opacity channel.  These are written as  a
3467              single  integer  equal to the main image quality plus 1000 times
3468              the opacity quality.  For example, if you want to use quality 75
3469              for  the main image and quality 90 to compress the opacity data,
3470              use -quality 90075.
3471
3472              For the PNM family of formats (PNM,  PGM,  and  PPM)  specify  a
3473              quality  factor  of zero in order to obtain the ASCII variant of
3474              the format. Note that -compress none used to be used to  trigger
3475              ASCII  output  but  provided  the  opposite  result  of what was
3476              expected as compared with other formats.
3477
3478              For the TIFF format, the JPEG, WebP, Zip, and  Zstd  compression
3479              algorithms  are  influenced by the quality value.  JPEG and WebP
3480              provide lossy compression so higher quality  produces  a  larger
3481              file  with less degradation.  The Zip and Zstd compression algo‐
3482              rithms (and WebP in lossless mode) are lossless  and  for  these
3483              algorithms  a higher ´quality' means to work harder to produce a
3484              smaller file, but with no difference in image quality.
3485
3486       -raise <width>x<height>
3487              lighten or darken image edges
3488
3489              This will create a 3-D effect. See -geometry for details details
3490              about the geometry specification. Offsets are not used.
3491
3492              Use -raise to create a raised effect, otherwise use +raise.
3493
3494       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
3495              random threshold the image
3496
3497              The  channel or channels specified in the <channeltype> argument
3498              are reduced to binary, using  an  random-threshold  method.  The
3499              choices  for  channeltype  are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3500              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3501
3502              When channeltype is "All", the  color  samples  are  thresholded
3503              into a graylevel and then that gray level is stored in the three
3504              color channels. Separately, the opacity channel  is  thresholded
3505              into  a  bilevel  opacity  value  which is stored in the opacity
3506              channel. For each pixel, a new random number is used  to  estab‐
3507              lish  the  threshold to be used. The threshold never exceeds the
3508              specified maximum (HIGH) and is never less  than  the  specified
3509              minimum (LOW).
3510
3511              When  channeltype  is  "intensity",  only  the color samples are
3512              thresholded. When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only  the
3513              opacity  channel  is  thresholded. The other named channels only
3514              threshold the associated channel.
3515
3516       -recolor <matrix>
3517              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
3518
3519              A user supplied color translation matrix (expressed  as  a  text
3520              string)  is  used to translate/blend the image channels based on
3521              weightings in a supplied matrix which may be of order  3  (color
3522              channels  only),  4  (color  channels plus opacity), or 5 (color
3523              channels plus opacity and offset).  Values in the columns of the
3524              matrix  (red, green, blue, opacity) are used as multipliers with
3525              the existing channel values and added together according to  the
3526              rows of the matrix.  Matrix values are floating point and may be
3527              negative.  The offset column (column 5) is purely  additive  and
3528              is  scaled  such  that 0.0 to 1.0 represents the maximum quantum
3529              range (but values are not limited to this range). The  math  for
3530              the  color  translation  matrix is similar to that used by Adobe
3531              Flash except that the offset is scaled to 1.0 (divide Flash off‐
3532              set  by 255 for use with GraphicsMagick) so that the results are
3533              independent of quantum depth.
3534
3535              An identity matrix exists for each matrix order which results in
3536              no  change to the image.  The translation matrix should be based
3537              on an alteration of the identity matrix.
3538
3539              Identity matrix of order 3
3540
3541                1 0 0
3542                0 1 0
3543                0 0 1
3544
3545
3546              which may be formatted into a convenient matrix argument similar
3547              to (comma is treated as white space):
3548
3549                -recolor "1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1"
3550
3551
3552              Identity matrix of order 4
3553
3554                1 0 0 0
3555                0 1 0 0
3556                0 0 1 0
3557                0 0 0 1
3558
3559
3560              Identity  matrix  of order 5.  The last row is required to exist
3561              for the purpose of parsing, but is otherwise not used.
3562
3563                1 0 0 0 0
3564                0 1 0 0 0
3565                0 0 1 0 0
3566                0 0 0 1 0
3567                0 0 0 0 1
3568
3569
3570              As an example, an image wrongly in BGR channel order may be con‐
3571              verted to RGB using this matrix (blue->red, red->blue):
3572
3573                0 0 1
3574                0 1 0
3575                1 0 0
3576
3577
3578              and  an  RGB  image using standard Rec.709 primaries may be con‐
3579              verted to grayscale using this matrix of standard weighting fac‐
3580              tors:
3581
3582                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3583                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3584                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3585
3586
3587              and  contrast may be reduced by scaling down by 80% and adding a
3588              10% offset:
3589
3590                0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1
3591                0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.1
3592                0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.1
3593                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.1
3594                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
3595
3596
3597       -red-primary <x>,<y>
3598              red chromaticity primary point
3599
3600       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3601              apply options to a portion of the image
3602
3603              The x and y offsets are treated in the same manner as in -crop.
3604
3605       -remote
3606              perform a X11 remote operation
3607
3608              The -remote command sends a command to a  "gm  display"  or  "gm
3609              animate"  which  is already running. The only command recognized
3610              at this time is the name of an image file to load. This capabil‐
3611              ity is very useful to load new images without needing to restart
3612              GraphicsMagick (e.g. for a slide-show or to  use  GraphicsMagick
3613              as  the  display  engine  for  a  different  GUI).  Also see the
3614              +progress option for a way to disable progress indication for  a
3615              clean look while loading new images.
3616
3617       -render
3618              render vector operations
3619
3620              Use  +render  to  turn  off rendering vector operations. This is
3621              useful when saving the result to vector formats such as  MVG  or
3622              SVG.
3623
3624       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
3625              Adjust image page offsets
3626
3627              Adjust  the  current  image  page canvas and position based on a
3628              relative page specification.  This option may be used to  change
3629              the  location of a subframe (e.g. part of an animation) prior to
3630              composition.   If  the  geometry   specification   is   absolute
3631              (includes  a  '!'),  then  the offset adjustment is absolute and
3632              there is no adjustment to page width and height,  otherwise  the
3633              page width and height values are also adjusted based on the cur‐
3634              rent image dimensions.  Use +repage to set the image  page  off‐
3635              sets to default.
3636
3637       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
3638              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
3639
3640              Resize  the  image so that its rendered size remains the same as
3641              the original at the specified target resolution. Either the cur‐
3642              rent  image  resolution  units or the previously set with -units
3643              are used to interpret the argument. For example, if  a  300  DPI
3644              image  renders at 3 inches by 2 inches on a 300 DPI device, when
3645              the image has been resampled to 72 DPI,  it  will  render  at  3
3646              inches  by  2 inches on a 72 DPI device.  Note that only a small
3647              number of image formats (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and TIFF)  are  capable
3648              of  storing  the image resolution. For formats which do not sup‐
3649              port an image resolution, the original resolution of  the  image
3650              must  be  specified  via  -density  on the command line prior to
3651              specifying the resample resolution.
3652
3653              Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image resolution  from  a
3654              proprietary  embedded  profile.  If  this  profile exists in the
3655              image, then Photoshop will continue to treat the image using its
3656              former  resolution,  ignoring  the image resolution specified in
3657              the standard file header.
3658
3659              Some image formats (e.g. PNG) require use of metric  or  english
3660              units  so even if the original image used a particular unit sys‐
3661              tem, if it is saved to a different format prior  to  resampling,
3662              then it may be necessary to specify the desired resolution units
3663              using -units since the original units may  have  been  lost.  In
3664              other  words,  do  not  assume  that  the  resolution  units are
3665              restored if the image has been saved to a file.
3666
3667       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3668              resize an image
3669
3670              This is an alias for the -geometry option and it behaves in  the
3671              same  manner. If the -filter option precedes the -resize option,
3672              the specified filter is used.
3673
3674              There are some exceptions:
3675
3676              When used as a composite option, -resize conveys  the  preferred
3677              size  of  the output image, while -geometry conveys the size and
3678              placement of the composite image within the main image.
3679
3680              When used as a montage option,  -resize  conveys  the  preferred
3681              size  of  the montage, while -geometry conveys information about
3682              the tiles.
3683
3684       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3685              roll an image vertically or horizontally
3686
3687              See -geometry for details the geometry specification.  The x and
3688              y offsets are not affected by the -gravity option.
3689
3690              A  negative x offset rolls the image left-to-right. A negative y
3691              offset rolls the image top-to-bottom.
3692
3693       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
3694              rotate the image
3695
3696              Positive angles rotate the image in a clockwise direction  while
3697              negative angles rotate counter-clockwise.
3698
3699              Use  > to rotate the image only if its width exceeds the height.
3700              < rotates the image only if its width is less than  the  height.
3701              For example, if you specify -rotate "-90>" and the image size is
3702              480x640, the image is not rotated.  However,  if  the  image  is
3703              640x480,  it  is  rotated  by  -90  degrees.  If you use > or <,
3704              enclose it in quotation marks to prevent it from being misinter‐
3705              preted as a file redirection.
3706
3707              Empty  triangles  left  over  from rotating the image are filled
3708              with the color defined as  background  (class  backgroundColor).
3709              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3710              -fill option.
3711
3712       -sample <geometry>
3713              scale image using pixel sampling
3714
3715              See -geometry for  details  about  the  geometry  specification.
3716              -sample  ignores  the -filter selection if the -filter option is
3717              present.  Offsets,  if  present  in  the  geometry  string,  are
3718              ignored, and the -gravity option has no effect.
3719
3720       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
3721              chroma subsampling factors
3722
3723              This  option  specifies  the  sampling factors to be used by the
3724              DPX, JPEG, MPEG, or YUV encoders for  chroma  downsampling.  The
3725              sampling factor must be specified while reading the raw YUV for‐
3726              mat since it is not preserved in  the  file  header.   Industry-
3727              standard  video subsampling notation such as "4:2:2" may also be
3728              used to specify the sampling factors. "4:2:2" is equivalent to a
3729              specification of "2x1"
3730
3731              The  JPEG  decoder  obtains  the  original sampling factors (and
3732              quality settings) when a JPEG file is read. To re-use the origi‐
3733              nal  sampling factors (and quality setting) when JPEG is output,
3734              use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3735
3736       -scale <geometry>
3737              scale the image.
3738
3739              See -geometry for  details  about  the  geometry  specification.
3740              -scale  uses  a  simpler,  faster  algorithm, and it ignores the
3741              -filter selection if the -filter option is present.  Offsets, if
3742              present  in  the  geometry string, are ignored, and the -gravity
3743              option has no effect.
3744
3745       -scene <value>
3746              set scene number
3747
3748              This option sets the scene number of an image or the first image
3749              in an image sequence.
3750
3751       -scenes <value-value>
3752              range of image scene numbers to read
3753
3754              Each  image in the range is read with the filename followed by a
3755              period (.) and the decimal scene number.  You  can  change  this
3756              behavior  by  embedding a %d, %0Nd, %o, %0No, %x, or %0Nx printf
3757              format specification in the file name. For example,
3758
3759                  gm montage -scenes 5-7 image.miff montage.miff
3760
3761
3762              makes  a  montage  of  files  image.miff.5,  image.miff.6,   and
3763              image.miff.7, and
3764
3765                  gm animate -scenes 0-12 image%02d.miff
3766
3767
3768              animates files image00.miff, image01.miff, through image12.miff.
3769
3770       -screen
3771              specify the screen to capture
3772
3773              This  option  indicates that the GetImage request used to obtain
3774              the image should  be  done  on  the  root  window,  rather  than
3775              directly  on  the specified window.  In this way, you can obtain
3776              pieces of other windows that overlap the specified  window,  and
3777              more importantly, you can capture menus or other popups that are
3778              independent windows but appear over the specified window.
3779
3780       -set <attribute> <value>
3781              set an image attribute
3782
3783              Set a named image attribute.  The attribute is set on  the  cur‐
3784              rent (previously specified on command line) image.
3785
3786       +set <attribute>
3787              unset an image attribute
3788
3789              Unset  a  named  image attribute.  The attribute is removed from
3790              the current (previously specified on command line) image.
3791
3792       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
3793              segment an image
3794
3795              Segment an image by analyzing the histograms of the color compo‐
3796              nents  and identifying units that are homogeneous with the fuzzy
3797              c-means technique.
3798
3799              Segmentation is a very useful fast  and  and  approximate  color
3800              quantization algorithm for scanned printed pages or scanned car‐
3801              toons. It may also be used as a special effect. Specify  cluster
3802              threshold as the minimum percentage of total pixels in a cluster
3803              before it is considered valid.  For huge images containing small
3804              detail,  this  may need to be a tiny fraction of a percent (e.g.
3805              0.015) so that important detail is not lost.  Smoothing  thresh‐
3806              old  eliminates noise in the second derivative of the histogram.
3807              As the value is increased, you can expect a smoother second  de‐
3808              rivative.  The  default is 1.5. Add the -verbose option to see a
3809              dump of cluster statistics given the parameters used.  The  sta‐
3810              tistics may be used as a guide to help fine tune the options.
3811
3812       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
3813              shade the image using a distant light source
3814
3815              Specify  azimuth  and  elevation  as  the  position of the light
3816              source. Use +shade to return the shading results as a  grayscale
3817              image.
3818
3819       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
3820              shadow the montage
3821
3822       -shared-memory
3823              use shared memory
3824
3825              This  option specifies whether the utility should attempt to use
3826              shared memory for pixmaps.  GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
3827              shared  memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
3828              extension.  Otherwise, this option is ignored.  The  default  is
3829              True.
3830
3831       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
3832              sharpen the image
3833
3834              Use  a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
3835              tion (sigma).
3836
3837       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
3838              shave pixels from the image edges
3839
3840              Specify the width of the region to be removed from both sides of
3841              the  image  and the height of the regions to be removed from top
3842              and bottom.
3843
3844       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
3845              shear the image along the X or Y axis
3846
3847              Use the specified positive or negative shear angle.
3848
3849              Shearing slides one edge of an image along the X or Y axis, cre‐
3850              ating a parallelogram. An X direction shear slides an edge along
3851              the X axis, while a Y direction shear slides an edge along the Y
3852              axis.  The  amount  of the shear is controlled by a shear angle.
3853              For X direction shears, x degrees is measured relative to the  Y
3854              axis,  and  similarly,  for Y direction shears y degrees is mea‐
3855              sured relative to the X axis.
3856
3857              Empty triangles left over from shearing  the  image  are  filled
3858              with  the  color  defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3859              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3860              -fill option.
3861
3862       -silent
3863              operate silently
3864
3865       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
3866              width and height of the image
3867
3868              Use  this  option  to specify the width and height of raw images
3869              whose dimensions are unknown such as  GRAY,  RGB,  or  CMYK.  In
3870              addition  to  width and height, use -size with an offset to skip
3871              any header information in the image or tell the number of colors
3872              in a MAP image file, (e.g. -size 640x512+256).
3873
3874              For Photo CD images, choose from these sizes:
3875
3876                   192x128
3877                   384x256
3878                   768x512
3879                   1536x1024
3880                   3072x2048
3881
3882
3883              Finally, use this option to choose a particular resolution layer
3884              of a JBIG or JPEG image (e.g. -size 1024x768).
3885
3886       -snaps <value>
3887              number of screen snapshots
3888
3889              Use this option to grab more than one image from  the  X  server
3890              screen, to create an animation sequence.
3891
3892       -solarize <factor>
3893              negate all pixels above the threshold level
3894
3895              Specify  factor  as  the percent threshold of the intensity (0 -
3896              99.9%).
3897
3898              This option produces a solarization effect seen when exposing  a
3899              photographic film to light during the development process.
3900
3901       -spread <amount>
3902              displace image pixels by a random amount
3903
3904              Amount defines the size of the neighborhood around each pixel to
3905              choose a candidate pixel to swap.
3906
3907       -stegano <offset>
3908              hide watermark within an image
3909
3910              Use an offset to start the image hiding some  number  of  pixels
3911              from the beginning of the image.  Note this offset and the image
3912              size.  You will need this information to  recover  the  stegano‐
3913              graphic image (e.g. display -size 320x256+35 stegano:image.png).
3914
3915       -stereo
3916              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
3917
3918              The  left side of the stereo pair is saved as the red channel of
3919              the output image.  The right side is saved as the green channel.
3920              Red-green  stereo  glasses  are  required  to  properly view the
3921              stereo image.
3922
3923       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
3924
3925              All embedded profiles and text attributes are stripped from  the
3926              image.  This is useful for images used for the web, or when out‐
3927              put files need to be as small as possible
3928
3929              Be careful not to use this option to remove  author,  copyright,
3930              and  license  information  that  you are required to retain when
3931              redistributing an image.
3932
3933       -stroke <color>
3934              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
3935
3936              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3937              -fill option.
3938
3939              See -draw for further details.
3940
3941       -strokewidth <value>
3942              set the stroke width
3943
3944              See -draw for further details.
3945
3946       -swirl <degrees>
3947              swirl image pixels about the center
3948
3949              Degrees defines the tightness of the swirl.
3950
3951       -text-font <name>
3952              font for writing fixed-width text
3953
3954              Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
3955              writer style) formatted text.  The default is 14 point Courier.
3956
3957              You can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript,  True‐
3958              Type,  or X11 font.  For example, Courier.ttf is a TrueType font
3959              and x:fixed is X11.
3960
3961       -texture <filename>
3962              name of texture to tile onto the image background
3963
3964       -threshold <value>{%}
3965              threshold the image
3966
3967              Modify the image such that any pixel sample  with  an  intensity
3968              value  greater than the threshold is assigned the maximum inten‐
3969              sity (white), or otherwise is  assigned  the  minimum  intensity
3970              (black). If a percent prefix is applied, then the threshold is a
3971              percentage of the available range.
3972
3973              To efficiently create a black  and  white  image  from  a  color
3974              image, use
3975
3976                  gm convert -threshold 50% in.png out.png
3977
3978
3979              The  optimum threshold value depends on the nature of the image.
3980              In order to threshold individual  channels,  use  the  -operator
3981              subcommand  with  it's Threshold, Threshold-White, or Threshold-
3982              Black options.
3983
3984       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3985              resize an image (quickly)
3986
3987              The -thumbnail command resizes the image as quickly as possible,
3988              with  more  concern  for  speed  than  resulting  image quality.
3989              Regardless, resulting image quality  should  be  acceptable  for
3990              many  uses.   It  is  primarily  intended to be used to generate
3991              smaller versions of the image, but may also be used  to  enlarge
3992              the  image.   The -thumbnail geometry argument observes the same
3993              syntax and rules as it does for -resize.
3994
3995       -tile <filename>
3996              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
3997
3998       -tile <geometry>
3999              layout of images [montage]
4000
4001       -title <string>
4002              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4003
4004              Use this option to assign a specific title to the image. This is
4005              assigned  to  the image window and is typically displayed in the
4006              window title bar.  Optionally you can include  the  image  file‐
4007              name,  type,  width, height, Exif data, or other image attribute
4008              by embedding special format characters described under the -for‐
4009              mat option.
4010
4011              For example,
4012
4013                   -title "%m:%f %wx%h"
4014
4015
4016              produces  an  image title of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
4017              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
4018
4019       -transform
4020              transform the image
4021
4022              This option applies the transformation matrix  from  a  previous
4023              -affine option.
4024
4025                  gm convert -affine 2,2,-2,2,0,0 -transform bird.ppm bird.jpg
4026
4027
4028       -transparent <color>
4029              make this color transparent within the image
4030
4031              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
4032              -fill option.
4033
4034       -treedepth <value>
4035              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4036
4037              Normally, this integer value is zero or one. A value of zero  or
4038              one causes the use of an optimal tree depth for the color reduc‐
4039              tion algorithm
4040
4041              An optimal depth generally allows the best representation of the
4042              source  image with the fastest computational speed and the least
4043              amount of memory.  However, the default depth  is  inappropriate
4044              for  some  images. To assure the best representation, try values
4045              between 2 and 8 for this parameter.  Refer to quantize for  more
4046              details.
4047
4048              The -colors or -monochrome option, or writing to an image format
4049              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
4050              take effect.
4051
4052       -trim  trim an image
4053
4054              This option removes any edges that are exactly the same color as
4055              the corner pixels.  Use -fuzz to make -trim  remove  edges  that
4056              are nearly the same color as the corner pixels.
4057
4058       -type <type>
4059              the image type
4060
4061              Choose  from:  Bilevel,  Grayscale, Palette, PaletteMatte, True‐
4062              Color, TrueColorMatte, ColorSeparation, ColorSeparationMatte, or
4063              Optimize.
4064
4065              Normally,  when  a  format supports different subformats such as
4066              bilevel, grayscale, palette, truecolor, and truecolor+alpha, the
4067              encoder  will  try  to  choose a suitable subformat based on the
4068              nature of the image. The -type option may be used to tailor  the
4069              output  subformat.  By  default the output subformat is based on
4070              readily available image information and is  usually  similar  to
4071              the input format.
4072
4073              Specify  -type Optimize in order to enable inspecting all pixels
4074              (if necessary) in order to find the  most  efficient  subformat.
4075              Inspecting  all of the pixels may be slow for very large images,
4076              particularly if they are stored in a disk cache. If an RGB image
4077              contains only gray pixels, then every pixel in the image must be
4078              inspected  in  order  to  decide  that  the  image  is  actually
4079              grayscale!
4080
4081              Sometimes a specific subformat is desired. For example, to force
4082              a JPEG image to be written in TrueColor RGB format  even  though
4083              only gray pixels are present, use
4084
4085                  gm convert bird.pgm -type TrueColor bird.jpg
4086
4087
4088              Similarly,  using -type TrueColorMatte will force the encoder to
4089              write an alpha channel even though the image is opaque,  if  the
4090              output format supports transparency.
4091
4092              Some  pseudo-formats  (e.g.  the  XC  format)  will  respect the
4093              requested type if it occurs previously on the command line.  For
4094              example, to obtain a DirectClass solid color canvas image rather
4095              than PsuedoClass, use
4096
4097                  gm convert -size 640x480 -type TrueColor xc:red red.miff
4098
4099
4100              Likewise, specify -type Bilevel, Grayscale, TrueColor, or  True‐
4101              ColorMatte  prior to reading a Postscript (or PDF file) in order
4102              to influence the type of image that Ghostcript returns.  Reading
4103              performance  will be dramatically improved for black/white Post‐
4104              script if Bilevel is specified, and will be considerably  faster
4105              if Grayscale is specified.
4106
4107       -update <seconds>
4108               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
4109
4110              Suppose  that while you are displaying an image the file that is
4111              currently displayed is over-written.  display will automatically
4112              detect  that the input file has been changed and update the dis‐
4113              played image accordingly.
4114
4115       -units <type>
4116              the units of image resolution
4117
4118              Choose from: Undefined, PixelsPerInch,  or  PixelsPerCentimeter.
4119              This  option  is  normally used in conjunction with the -density
4120              option.
4121
4122       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
4123              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
4124
4125              The -unsharp option sharpens an image. The  image  is  convolved
4126              with a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
4127              tion (sigma). For reasonable results, radius  should  be  larger
4128              than  sigma. Use a radius of 0 to have the method select a suit‐
4129              able radius.
4130
4131              The parameters are:
4132
4133
4134               radius
4135
4136
4137                    The radius of the Gaussian, in pixels,  not  counting  the
4138                    center pixel (default 0).
4139
4140               sigma
4141
4142
4143                    The standard deviation of the Gaussian, in pixels (default
4144                    1.0).
4145
4146               amount
4147
4148
4149                    The percentage of the difference between the original  and
4150                    the  blur  image  that  is  added  back  into the original
4151                    (default 1.0).
4152
4153               threshold
4154
4155
4156                    The threshold, as a fraction of MaxRGB,  needed  to  apply
4157                    the difference amount (default 0.05).
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162       -use-pixmap
4163              use the pixmap
4164
4165       -verbose
4166              print detailed information about the image
4167
4168              This  information  is  printed:  image scene number; image name;
4169              image size; the image class (DirectClass  or  PseudoClass);  the
4170              total number of unique colors; and the number of seconds to read
4171              and transform the image. If the image is DirectClass, the  total
4172              number  of  unique  colors  is  not displayed unless -verbose is
4173              specified twice since it may take quite a long time to  compute,
4174              particularly  for deep images.  If the image is PseudoClass then
4175              its pixels are defined by indexes into a colormap. If the  image
4176              is  DirectClass then each pixel includes a complete and indepen‐
4177              dent color specification.
4178
4179              If -colors is also specified, the total  unique  colors  in  the
4180              image  and  color  reduction  error values are printed. Refer to
4181              quantize for a description of these values.
4182
4183       -version
4184              print GraphicsMagick version string
4185
4186       -view <string>
4187              FlashPix viewing parameters
4188
4189       -virtual-pixel <method>
4190              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
4191
4192              This option defines "virtual pixels" for use in operations  that
4193              can access pixels outside the boundaries of an image.
4194
4195              Choose from these methods:
4196
4197
4198               Constant
4199
4200
4201                    Use the image background color.
4202
4203               Edge
4204
4205
4206                    Extend the edge pixel toward infinity (default).
4207
4208               Mirror
4209
4210
4211                    Mirror the image.
4212
4213               Tile
4214
4215
4216                    Tile the image.
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221               This  option affects operations that use virtual pixels such as
4222               -blur, -sharpen, -wave, etc.
4223
4224       -visual <type>
4225              animate images using this X visual type
4226
4227              Choose from these visual classes:
4228
4229                   StaticGray
4230                   GrayScale
4231                   StaticColor
4232                   PseudoColor
4233                   TrueColor
4234                   DirectColor
4235                   default
4236                   visual id
4237
4238
4239              The X server must support the visual you  choose,  otherwise  an
4240              error  occurs.   If  a visual is not specified, the visual class
4241              that can display the most simultaneous  colors  on  the  default
4242              screen is chosen.
4243
4244       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
4245              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
4246
4247       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
4248              alter an image along a sine wave
4249
4250              Specify amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
4251
4252       -white-point <x>,<y>
4253              chromaticity white point
4254
4255       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
4256              pixels above the threshold become white
4257
4258              Use  -white-threshold to set pixels with values above the speci‐
4259              fied threshold to maximum value (white). If only  one  value  is
4260              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
4261              intensity thresholding is used. If the  color  threshold  values
4262              are  not  identical then channel-based thresholding is used, and
4263              color distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g.  -1)
4264              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
4265              a channel later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%)  symbol  is
4266              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
4267              range.
4268
4269       -window <id>
4270              make image the background of a window
4271
4272              id can be a window id or name.  Specify root to select X's  root
4273              window as the target window.
4274
4275              By  default the image is tiled onto the background of the target
4276              window.   If backdrop or -geometry are specified, the  image  is
4277              surrounded  by  the  background color.  Refer to X RESOURCES for
4278              details.
4279
4280              The image will not display on the root window if the  image  has
4281              more  unique colors than the target window colormap allows.  Use
4282              -colors to reduce the number of colors.
4283
4284       -window-group
4285              specify the window group
4286
4287       -write <filename>
4288              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
4289
4290              The current image is written to the specified filename and  then
4291              processing continues using that image. The following is an exam‐
4292              ple of how several sizes of an image may  be  generated  in  one
4293              command (repeat as often as needed):
4294
4295                  gm convert input.jpg -resize 50% -write input50.jpg \
4296                            -resize 25% input25.jpg
4297
4298
4299       -write <filename>
4300              write the image to a file [display]
4301
4302              If  filename  already exists, you will be prompted as to whether
4303              it should be overwritten.
4304
4305              By default, the image is written in the format that it was  read
4306              in  as.   To  specify a particular image format, prefix filename
4307              with the image type and a colon (e.g., ps:image) or specify  the
4308              image type as the filename suffix (e.g., image.ps). Specify file
4309              as - for standard output. If file has the extension .Z  or  .gz,
4310              the file size is compressed using compress or gzip respectively.
4311              Precede the image file name with | to pipe to a system command.
4312
4313              Use -compress to specify the type of image compression.
4314
4315              The equivalent X  resource  for  this  option  is  writeFilename
4316              (class WriteFilename).  See "X Resources", below, for details.
4317

ENVIRONMENT

4319       COLUMNS
4320              Output  screen  width. Used when formatting text for the screen.
4321              Many Unix systems keep this shell variable up to  date,  but  it
4322              may  need  to be explicitly exported in order for GraphicsMagick
4323              to see it.
4324
4325       DISPLAY
4326              X11 display ID (host, display number, and  screen  in  the  form
4327              hostname:display.screen).
4328
4329       HOME   Location  of  user's home directory. GraphicsMagick searches for
4330              configuration files in $HOME/.magick if  the  directory  exists.
4331              See  MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH,  MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH,  and MAG‐
4332              ICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH if more flexibility is needed.
4333
4334       MAGICK_ACCESS_MONITOR
4335              When set to TRUE, command line monitor mode (enabled  by  -moni‐
4336              tor)  will  also show files accessed (including temporary files)
4337              and any external commands which are executed. This is useful for
4338              debugging,  but  also illustrates arguments made available to an
4339              access handler registered by the MagickSetConfirmAccessHandler()
4340              C library function.
4341
4342       MAGICK_CODER_STABILITY
4343              The  minimum  coder  stability level before it will be used. The
4344              available levels are PRIMARY, STABLE, UNSTABLE, and BROKEN.  The
4345              default  minimum  level is UNSTABLE, which means that all avail‐
4346              able working coders will be used. The purpose of this option  is
4347              to  reduce the security exposure (or apparent complexity) due to
4348              the huge number of formats  supported.  Coders  at  the  PRIMARY
4349              level are commonly used formats with very well maintained imple‐
4350              mentations. Coders at the STABLE level are reasonably well main‐
4351              tained  but  represent less used formats. Coders at the UNSTABLE
4352              level either have weak implementations, the file  format  itself
4353              is  weak, or the probability the coder will be needed is vanish‐
4354              ingly small. Coders at the BROKEN level are known to  often  not
4355              work  properly  or might not be useful in their current state at
4356              all.
4357
4358       MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH
4359              Search path to use when searching for image  format  coder  mod‐
4360              ules.  This path allows the user to arbitrarily extend the image
4361              formats supported by GraphicsMagick by adding  loadable  modules
4362              to  an  arbitrary  location  rather  than  copying them into the
4363              GraphicsMagick installation directory.  The  formatting  of  the
4364              search  path  is  similar to operating system search paths (i.e.
4365              colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited for Microsoft
4366              Windows).  This user specified search path is used before trying
4367              the default search path.
4368
4369       MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH
4370              Search path to  use  when  searching  for  configuration  (.mgk)
4371              files.   The formatting of the search path is similar to operat‐
4372              ing system search paths (i.e.  colon  delimited  for  Unix,  and
4373              semi-colon delimited for Microsoft Windows). This user specified
4374              search path is used before trying the default search path.
4375
4376       MAGICK_DEBUG
4377              Debug options (see -debug for details).  Setting  debug  options
4378              via  an  environment  variable is currently necessary to see the
4379              complete initialization process.
4380
4381       MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4382              Search path to use when searching  for  filter  process  modules
4383              (invoked via -process). This path allows the user to arbitrarily
4384              extend GraphicsMagick's image processing functionality by adding
4385              loadable  modules  to  an arbitrary location rather than copying
4386              them into the GraphicsMagick installation directory. The format‐
4387              ting  of  the  search path is similar to operating system search
4388              paths (i.e. colon delimited for Unix, and  semi-colon  delimited
4389              for  Microsoft Windows). This user specified search path is used
4390              before trying the default search path.
4391
4392       MAGICK_GHOSTSCRIPT_PATH
4393              For Microsoft Windows,  specify  the  path  to  the  Ghostscript
4394              installation  rather  than searching for it via the Windows reg‐
4395              istry.  This helps in case Ghostscript is not installed via  the
4396              Ghostscript  Windows  installer  or  the user wants more control
4397              over the Ghostscript used.
4398
4399       MAGICK_HOME
4400              Path to  top  of  GraphicsMagick  installation  directory.  Only
4401              observed  by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do not
4402              have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.
4403
4404       MAGICK_MMAP_READ
4405              If MAGICK_MMAP_READ is set to TRUE, GraphicsMagick will  attempt
4406              to  memory-map the input file for reading. This usually substan‐
4407              tially improves repeated read  performance  since  the  file  is
4408              already  in  memory  after the first time it has been read. How‐
4409              ever, testing shows that performance may be  reduced  for  files
4410              accessed  for  the  first  time since data is accessed via page-
4411              faults (upon first access) and many operating systems fail to do
4412              sequential  read-ahead  of memory mapped files, and particularly
4413              if those files are accessed over a network.  If many large input
4414              files  are  read, then enabling this option may harm performance
4415              by overloading the operating system's VM system as it then needs
4416              to free unmapped pages and map new ones.
4417
4418       MAGICK_IO_FSYNC
4419              If  MAGICK_IO_FSYNC  is  set  to  TRUE, then GraphicsMagick will
4420              request that the output file is fully flushed  and  synchronized
4421              to  disk  when  it is closed. This incurs a performance penalty,
4422              but has the benefit that  if  the  power  fails  or  the  system
4423              crashes,  the  file  should be valid on disk. If image files are
4424              referenced from a database, then this option helps  assure  that
4425              the files referenced by the database are valid.
4426
4427       MAGICK_IOBUF_SIZE
4428              The  amount  of I/O buffering (in bytes) to use when reading and
4429              writing encoded files. The default is 16384, which  is  observed
4430              to work well for many cases. The best value for a local filesys‐
4431              tem is usually the the native filesystem block size (e.g.  4096,
4432              8192,  or  even 131,072 for ZFS) in order to minimize the number
4433              of physical disk  I/O  operations.   I/O  performance  to  files
4434              accessed over a network may benefit significantly by tuning this
4435              option. Larger values are not necessarily better  (they  may  be
4436              slower!),  and  there  is  rarely  any benefit from using values
4437              larger than 32768. Use convert's -verbose  option  in  order  to
4438              evaluate read and write rates in pixels per second while keeping
4439              in mind that the operating system will try  to  cache  files  in
4440              RAM.
4441
4442       MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK
4443              Maximum amount of disk space allowed for use by the pixel cache.
4444
4445       MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES
4446              Maximum number of open files.
4447
4448       MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP
4449              Maximum  size  of  a  memory  mapped  file allocation.  A memory
4450              mapped file consumes memory when the file is accessed,  although
4451              the system may reclaim such memory when needed.
4452
4453       MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY
4454              Maximum amount of memory to allocate from the heap.
4455
4456       MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS
4457              Maximum  number  of total pixels (image rows times image colums)
4458              to allow for any image which is requested to be created or read.
4459              This  is  useful  to place a limit on how large an image may be.
4460              If the input image file has image  dimensions  larger  than  the
4461              pixel  limit,  then the image memory allocation is denied and an
4462              error is returned immediately.  This is a  per-image  limit  and
4463              does  not limit the total number of pixels due to multiple image
4464              frames/pages (e.g. multi-page document or an animation).
4465
4466       MAGICK_LIMIT_WIDTH
4467              Maximum pixel width of an image read, or created.
4468
4469       MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT
4470              Maximum pixel height of an image read, or created.
4471
4472       MAGICK_TMPDIR
4473              Path to directory where GraphicsMagick  should  write  temporary
4474              files. The default is to use the system default, or the location
4475              set by TMPDIR.
4476
4477       TMPDIR For POSIX-compatible systems (Unix-compatible), the path to  the
4478              directory  where  all applications should write temporary files.
4479              Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR if it is set.
4480
4481       TMP or TEMP
4482              For Microsoft Windows, the path to the directory where  applica‐
4483              tions  should write temporary files. Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR
4484              if it is set.
4485
4486       OMP_NUM_THREADS
4487              As per the OpenMP standard, this specifies the number of threads
4488              to use in parallel regions. Some compilers default the number of
4489              threads to use to the number of processor cores available  while
4490              others  default to just one thread. See the OpenMP specification
4491              for other standard adjustments and your  compiler's  manual  for
4492              vendor-specific settings.
4493

CONFIGURATION FILES

4495       GraphicsMagick uses a number of XML format configuration files:
4496
4497       colors.mgk
4498              colors configuration file
4499
4500                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4501                <colormap>
4502                  <color name="AliceBlue" red="240" green="248" blue="255"
4503                         compliance="SVG, X11, XPM" />
4504                </colormap>
4505
4506
4507       delegates.mgk
4508              delegates configuration file
4509
4510       log.mgk
4511              logging configuration file
4512
4513                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4514                <magicklog>
4515                  <log events="None" />
4516                  <log output="stdout" />
4517                  <log filename="Magick-%d.log" />
4518                  <log generations="3" />
4519                  <log limit="2000" />
4520                  <log format="%t %r %u %p %m/%f/%l/%d:\n  %e"  />
4521                </magicklog>
4522
4523
4524       modules.mgk
4525              loadable modules configuration file
4526
4527                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4528                <modulemap>
4529                  <module magick="8BIM" name="META" />
4530                </modulemap>
4531
4532
4533       type.mgk
4534              master type (fonts) configuration file
4535
4536                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4537                <typemap>
4538                  <include file="type-windows.mgk" />
4539                  <type
4540                    name="AvantGarde-Book"
4541                    fullname="AvantGarde Book"
4542                    family="AvantGarde"
4543                    foundry="URW"
4544                    weight="400"
4545                    style="normal"
4546                    stretch="normal"
4547                    format="type1"
4548                    metrics="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.afm"
4549                    glyphs="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.pfb"
4550                  />
4551                </typemap>
4552
4553

GM ANIMATE

4555       Animate  displays  a sequence of images on any workstation display run‐
4556       ning an X server. animate first determines the hardware capabilities of
4557       the  workstation.  If  the  number of unique colors in an image is less
4558       than or equal to the number the workstation can support, the  image  is
4559       displayed  in  an X window. Otherwise the number of colors in the image
4560       is first reduced to match  the  color  resolution  of  the  workstation
4561       before it is displayed.
4562
4563       This  means  that a continuous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel image can display
4564       on a 8 bit pseudo-color device or monochrome device. In most  instances
4565       the  reduced color image closely resembles the original. Alternatively,
4566       a monochrome or pseudo-color image sequence can display on  a  continu‐
4567       ous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel device.
4568
4569       To help prevent color flashing on X server visuals that have colormaps,
4570       animate creates a single colormap from the image sequence. This can  be
4571       rather  time consuming. You can speed this operation up by reducing the
4572       colors in the image before you "animate" them.  Use  mogrify  to  color
4573       reduce  the  images  to  a single colormap. See mogrify(1) for details.
4574       Alternatively, you can use a Standard Colormap; or a static, direct, or
4575       true  color  visual.  You can define a Standard Colormap with xstdcmap.
4576       See xstdcmap(1) for details. This method is recommended for colormapped
4577       X server because it eliminates the need to compute a global colormap.
4578

EXAMPLES

4580       To animate a set of images of a cockatoo, use:
4581
4582           gm animate cockatoo.*
4583
4584
4585       To  animate a cockatoo image sequence while using the Standard Colormap
4586       best, use:
4587
4588           xstdcmap -best
4589           gm animate -map best cockatoo.*
4590
4591
4592       To animate an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a  back‐
4593       drop, use:
4594
4595
4596           gm animate +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.*
4597
4598

OPTIONS

4600       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
4601
4602
4603       -authenticate <string>
4604              decrypt image with this password
4605
4606       -backdrop
4607              display the image centered on a backdrop.
4608
4609       -background <color>
4610              the background color
4611
4612       -bordercolor <color>
4613              the border color
4614
4615       -borderwidth <geometry>
4616              the border width
4617
4618       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4619              remove pixels from the interior of an image
4620
4621       -colormap <type>
4622              define the colormap type
4623
4624       -colors <value>
4625              preferred number of colors in the image
4626
4627       -colorspace <value>
4628              the type of colorspace
4629
4630       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4631              preferred size and location of the cropped image
4632
4633       -debug <events>
4634              enable debug printout
4635
4636       -define <key>{=<value>},...
4637              add coder/decoder specific options
4638
4639       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
4640              display the next image after pausing
4641
4642       -density <width>x<height>
4643              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
4644
4645       -depth <value>
4646              depth of the image
4647
4648       -display <host:display[.screen]>
4649              specifies the X server to contact
4650
4651       -dispose <method>
4652              GIF disposal method
4653
4654       -dither
4655              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
4656
4657       -font <name>
4658              use this font when annotating the image with text
4659
4660       -foreground <color>
4661              define the foreground color
4662
4663       -gamma <value>
4664              level of gamma correction
4665
4666       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
4667              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
4668
4669       -help  print usage instructions
4670
4671       -iconGeometry <geometry>
4672              specify the icon geometry
4673
4674       -iconic
4675              iconic animation
4676
4677       -interlace <type>
4678              the type of interlacing scheme
4679
4680       -limit <type> <value>
4681              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
4682              resource limit
4683
4684       -log <string>
4685              Specify format for debug log
4686
4687       -map <type>
4688              display image using this type.
4689
4690       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
4691
4692       -mattecolor <color>
4693              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
4694
4695       -monitor
4696              show progress indication
4697
4698       -monochrome
4699              transform the image to black and white
4700
4701       -name  name an image
4702
4703       -noop  NOOP (no option)
4704
4705       -pause <seconds>
4706              pause between animation loops [animate]
4707
4708       -remote
4709              perform a X11 remote operation
4710
4711       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
4712              rotate the image
4713
4714       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
4715              chroma subsampling factors
4716
4717       -scenes <value-value>
4718              range of image scene numbers to read
4719
4720       -shared-memory
4721              use shared memory
4722
4723       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
4724              width and height of the image
4725
4726       -text-font <name>
4727              font for writing fixed-width text
4728
4729       -title <string>
4730              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4731
4732       -treedepth <value>
4733              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4734
4735       -trim  trim an image
4736
4737       -type <type>
4738              the image type
4739
4740       -verbose
4741              print detailed information about the image
4742
4743       -version
4744              print GraphicsMagick version string
4745
4746       -visual <type>
4747              animate images using this X visual type
4748
4749       -window <id>
4750              make image the background of a window
4751
4752              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
4753              above.
4754
4755
4756              Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for
4757              the group of images following it, until the group is  terminated
4758              by  the appearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to ani‐
4759              mate three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with  an
4760              unlimited  number  of colors, and the third with only 16 colors,
4761              use:
4762
4763
4764                  gm animate -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
4765                           -colors 16 cockatoo.3
4766
4767
4768              Animate options can appear on the command  line  or  in  your  X
4769              resources  file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede
4770              values specified in your X resources file.  Image filenames  may
4771              appear  in  any order on the command line if the image format is
4772              MIFF (refer to miff(5) and the scene keyword is specified in the
4773              image.  Otherwise  the  images  will  display  in the order they
4774              appear on the command line.
4775

MOUSE BUTTONS

4777       Press any button to map or unmap the Command widget. See the next  sec‐
4778       tion for more information about the Command widget.
4779

COMMAND WIDGET

4781       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
4782
4783           Animate
4784
4785               Open
4786               Play
4787               Step
4788               Repeat
4789               Auto Reverse
4790
4791           Speed
4792
4793               Faster
4794               Slower
4795
4796           Direction
4797
4798               Forward
4799               Reverse
4800
4801           Image Info
4802           Help
4803           Quit
4804
4805
4806       Menu  items  with  a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
4807       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
4808       pointer  to  the appropriate menu and press a button and drag. When you
4809       find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the  command  is
4810       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
4811       execute a particular command.
4812

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

4814               Ctl+O
4815
4816                    Press to load an image from a file.
4817               space
4818
4819                    Press to display the next image in the sequence.
4820               <
4821
4822                    Press to speed-up the display of  the  images.   Refer  to
4823                    -delay for more information.
4824               >
4825
4826                    Press  to slow the display of the images.  Refer to -delay
4827                    for more information.
4828               ?
4829
4830                    Press to display information about the image.   Press  any
4831                    key or button to erase the information.
4832                    This  information is printed: image name;  image size; and
4833                    the total number of unique colors in the image.
4834               F1
4835
4836                    Press to display helpful information about animate(1).
4837               Ctl-q
4838
4839                    Press to discard all images and exit program.
4840
4841

X RESOURCES

4843       Animate options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
4844       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
4845       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
4846
4847       All animate options have a corresponding X resource. In  addition,  the
4848       animate program uses the following X resources:
4849
4850               background (class Background)
4851
4852
4853                    Specifies  the preferred color to use for the Image window
4854                    background. The default is #ccc.
4855               borderColor (class BorderColor)
4856
4857
4858                    Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image  window
4859                    border. The default is #ccc.
4860               borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
4861
4862
4863                    Specifies  the width in pixels of the Image window border.
4864                    The default is 2.
4865               font (class Font or FontList)
4866
4867
4868                    Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in  normal
4869                    formatted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
4870               foreground (class Foreground)
4871
4872
4873                    Specifies  the  preferred color to use for text within the
4874                    Image window.  The default is black.
4875               geometry (class geometry)
4876
4877
4878                    Specifies the preferred size and  position  of  the  image
4879                    window.  It  is  not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
4880                    agers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.  A
4881                    negative  x  offset is measured from the right edge of the
4882                    screen to the right edge of the icon,  and  a  negative  y
4883                    offset  is  measured from the bottom edge of the screen to
4884                    the bottom edge of the icon.
4885               iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
4886
4887
4888                    Specifies the preferred size and position of the  applica‐
4889                    tion  when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all
4890                    window managers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in  the
4891                    same manner as in class Geometry.
4892               iconic (class Iconic)
4893
4894
4895                    This  resource  indicates  that  you would prefer that the
4896                    application's windows initially not be visible as  if  the
4897                    windows  had  be immediately iconified by you. Window man‐
4898                    agers may choose not to honor the application's request.
4899               matteColor (class MatteColor)
4900
4901
4902                    Specify the color of windows. It is  used  for  the  back‐
4903                    grounds  of  windows,  menus,  and notices. A 3D effect is
4904                    achieved by using highlight and shadow colors derived from
4905                    this color. Default value: #ddd.
4906               name (class Name)
4907
4908
4909                    This resource specifies the name under which resources for
4910                    the application should be found. This resource  is  useful
4911                    in  shell aliases to distinguish between invocations of an
4912                    application, without resorting to creating links to  alter
4913                    the  executable  file name. The default is the application
4914                    name.
4915               sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
4916
4917
4918                    This resource specifies whether animate should attempt use
4919                    shared  memory  for  pixmaps. ImageMagick must be compiled
4920                    with shared memory support, and the display  must  support
4921                    the   MIT-SHM   extension.  Otherwise,  this  resource  is
4922                    ignored. The default is True.
4923               text_font (class textFont)
4924
4925
4926                    Specifies the name of the preferred font to use  in  fixed
4927                    (typewriter style) formatted text. The default is 14 point
4928                    Courier.
4929               title (class Title)
4930
4931
4932                    This resource specifies the title to be used for the Image
4933                    window.  This  information  is  sometimes used by a window
4934                    manager to provide some sort  of  header  identifying  the
4935                    window. The default is the image file name.
4936
4937

GM BATCH

DESCRIPTION

4940       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
4941       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
4942       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
4943       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
4944

EXAMPLES

4946        To drive 'gm batch' using a shell script (or a program written in  any
4947       language),  have the script/program send commands to 'gm batch' via its
4948       standard input.  Specify that standard input should be  used  by  using
4949       '-'  as the file name.  The following example converts all files match‐
4950       ing '*.jpg' to TIFF format while rotating each file by 90  degrees  and
4951       stripping  all  embedded profiles.  The shell script syntax is standard
4952       Unix shell:
4953
4954         for file in *.jpg
4955         do
4956           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4957           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4958           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4959         done | gm batch -echo on -feedback on -
4960
4961
4962       We can accomplish the same as the previous example by putting  all  the
4963       commands  in  a text file and then specifying the name of the text file
4964       as the script to execute:
4965
4966         for file in *.jpg
4967         do
4968           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4969           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4970           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4971         done > script.txt
4972         gm batch -echo on -feedback on script.txt
4973
4974

OPTIONS

4976       Options are processed from left to right and  must  appear  before  any
4977       filename argument.
4978
4979       -echo on|off
4980              command echo on or off
4981
4982              Specify on to enable echoing commands to standard output as they
4983              are read or off to disable.  The default is off.
4984
4985       -escape unix|windows
4986              Parse using unix or windows syntax
4987
4988              Commands must be parsed from the input stream and escaping needs
4989              to be used to protect spaces or quoting characters in the input.
4990              Specify unix to use unix-style command line parsing  or  windows
4991              for  Microsoft  Windows command shell style parsing. The default
4992              depends on if the software is compiled for Microsoft Windows  or
4993              for  a Unix-type system (including Cygwin on Microsoft Windows).
4994              It is recommended to use unix syntax because it is more powerful
4995              and more portable.
4996
4997       -fail text
4998              text to print if a command fails
4999
5000              When  feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5001              the command fails.  The default text is FAIL.
5002
5003       -feedback on|off
5004              enable error feedback
5005
5006              Print text (see -pass and -fail  options)  feedback  after  each
5007              command to indicate the result, the default is off.
5008
5009       -help
5010
5011              Prints batch command help.
5012
5013       -pass text
5014              text to print if a command passes
5015
5016              When  feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5017              the command passes.  The default text is PASS.
5018
5019       -prompt text
5020              Prompt text to use for command line
5021
5022              If no filename argument was specified, a simple  command  prompt
5023              appears  where  you  may  enter  GraphicsMagick  commands.   The
5024              default prompt is GM>.  Use this option to change the prompt  to
5025              something else.
5026
5027       -stop-on-error on|off
5028              Specify if command processing stops on error
5029
5030              Normally command processing continues if a command encounters an
5031              error.  Specify -stop-on-error on to cause  processing  to  quit
5032              immediately on error.
5033

GM BENCHMARK

DESCRIPTION

5036       benchmark  executes  an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g. convert) for
5037       one or more loops, and/or a specified execution time, and reports  many
5038       execution metrics.  For builds using OpenMP, a mode is provided to exe‐
5039       cute the benchmark with an increasing number of threads and  provide  a
5040       report  of speedup and multi-thread execution efficiency.  If benchmark
5041       is used to execute a command without any additional benchmark  options,
5042       then the command is run once.
5043

EXAMPLES

5045       To obtain benchmark information for a single execution of a command:
5046
5047           gm benchmark convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5048
5049       To obtain benchmark information from 100 iterations of the command:
5050
5051           gm benchmark -iterations 100 convert input.ppm \
5052             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5053
5054       To obtain benchmark information by iterating the command until a speci‐
5055       fied amount of time (in seconds) has been consumed:
5056
5057           gm benchmark -duration 30 convert input.ppm \
5058             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5059
5060       To obtain a full  performance  report  with  an  increasing  number  of
5061       threads  (1-32  threads,  stepping  the  number of threads by four each
5062       time):
5063
5064           gm benchmark -duration 3 -stepthreads 4 convert \
5065             input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
5066
5067       Here is the interpretation of the output:
5068
5069           threads - number of threads used.
5070           iter - number of command iterations executed.
5071           user - total user time consumed.
5072           total - total elapsed time consumed.
5073           iter/s - number of command iterations per second.
5074           iter/cpu - amount of CPU time consumed per iteration.
5075           speedup - speedup compared with one thread.
5076           karp-flatt - Karp-Flatt measure of speedup efficiency.
5077
5078       Please note that the reported "speedup" is based on the execution  time
5079       of  just  one thread.  A preliminary warm-up pass is used before timing
5080       the first loop in order to ensure that the CPU is brought out of power-
5081       saving  modes  and  that system caches are warmed up.  Most modern CPUs
5082       provide a "turbo" mode where the CPU clock speed is increased (e.g.  by
5083       a  factor  of  two)  when only one or two cores are active.  If the CPU
5084       grows excessively hot (due to insufficient cooling), then it  may  dial
5085       back  its  clock  rates as a form of thermal management.  These factors
5086       result in an under-reporting of speedup compared to if "turbo" mode was
5087       disabled  and  the CPU does not need to worry about thermal management.
5088       The powertop utility available under Linux and Solaris provides  a  way
5089       to observe CPU core clock rates while a benchmark is running.
5090

OPTIONS

5092        Options  are  processed  from left to right and must appear before any
5093       argument.
5094
5095       -duration duration
5096              duration to run benchmark Specify the number of seconds  to  run
5097              the  benchmark.  The  command  is  executed repeatedly until the
5098              specified amount of time has elapsed.
5099
5100       -help
5101
5102              Prints benchmark command help.
5103
5104       -iterations loops
5105              number of command iterations Specify the number of iterations to
5106              run  the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until the
5107              specified number of iterations has been reached.
5108
5109       -rawcsv
5110              Print results in CSV format Print results in  a  comma-separated
5111              value  (CSV)  format  which  is  easy  to  parse for plotting or
5112              importing into a spreadsheet or database.  The  values  reported
5113              are threads, iterations, user_time, and elapsed_time.
5114
5115       -stepthreads step
5116              execute a per-thread benchmark ramp
5117               Execute a per-thread benchmark ramp, incrementing the number of
5118              threads at each step by the specified value.  The maximum number
5119              of  threads  is taken from the standard OMP_NUM_THREADS environ‐
5120              ment variable.
5121

GM COMPARE

5123       compare compares two  similar  images  using  a  specified  statistical
5124       method (see -metric) and/or by writing a difference image (-file), with
5125       the altered pixels annotated using a specified method (see  -highlight-
5126       style)  and color (see -highlight-color). Reference-image is the origi‐
5127       nal image and compare-image is the (possibly)  altered  version,  which
5128       should have the same dimensions as reference-image.
5129

EXAMPLES

5131       To  compare two images using Mean Square Error (MSE) statistical analy‐
5132       sis use:
5133
5134           gm compare -metric mse original.miff compare.miff
5135
5136
5137       To create an annotated difference image use:
5138
5139           gm compare -highlight-style assign -highlight-color purple \
5140             -file diff.miff original.miff compare.miff
5141
5142

OPTIONS

5144       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5145       the  command  line  remains  in effect only for the image that follows.
5146       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5147
5148       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5149
5150
5151       -authenticate <string>
5152              decrypt image with this password
5153
5154       -colorspace <value>
5155              the type of colorspace
5156
5157       -debug <events>
5158              enable debug printout
5159
5160       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5161              add coder/decoder specific options
5162
5163       -density <width>x<height>
5164              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5165
5166       -depth <value>
5167              depth of the image
5168
5169       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5170              specifies the X server to contact
5171
5172       -endian <type>
5173              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5174
5175       -file <filename>
5176              write annotated difference image to file
5177
5178       -help  print usage instructions
5179
5180       -highlight-color <color>
5181              pixel annotation color
5182
5183       -highlight-style <style>
5184              pixel annotation style
5185
5186       -interlace <type>
5187              the type of interlacing scheme
5188
5189       -limit <type> <value>
5190              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
5191              resource limit
5192
5193       -log <string>
5194              Specify format for debug log
5195
5196       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5197
5198       -maximum-error <limit>
5199              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
5200
5201       -metric <metric>
5202              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
5203
5204       -monitor
5205              show progress indication
5206
5207       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5208              chroma subsampling factors
5209
5210       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5211              width and height of the image
5212
5213       -type <type>
5214              the image type
5215
5216       -verbose
5217              print detailed information about the image
5218
5219       -version
5220              print GraphicsMagick version string
5221
5222              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
5223              above.
5224
5225

GM COMPOSITE

5227       composite composites (combines) images to  create  new  images.   base-
5228       image  is the base image and change-image contains the changes.  ouput-
5229       image is the result, and normally has  the  same  dimensions  as  base-
5230       image.
5231
5232
5233       The  optional mask-image can be used to provide opacity information for
5234       change-image when it has none or if you want a different mask.  A  mask
5235       image  is typically grayscale and the same size as base-image. If mask-
5236       image is not grayscale, it is converted to grayscale and the  resulting
5237       intensities are used as opacity information.
5238

EXAMPLES

5240       To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch, use:
5241
5242           gm composite cockatoo.miff perch.ras composite.miff
5243
5244
5245       To compute the difference between images in a series, use:
5246
5247           gm composite -compose difference series.2 series.1
5248                     difference.miff
5249
5250
5251       To  composite  an image of a cockatoo with a perch starting at location
5252       (100,150), use:
5253
5254           gm composite -geometry +100+150 cockatoo.miff
5255                     perch.ras composite.miff
5256
5257
5258       To tile a logo across your image of a cockatoo, use
5259
5260           gm convert +shade 30x60 cockatoo.miff mask.miff
5261           gm composite -compose bumpmap -tile logo.png
5262                     cockatoo.miff mask.miff composite.miff
5263
5264
5265       To composite a red, green, and blue color plane into a single composite
5266       image, try
5267
5268           gm composite -compose CopyGreen green.png red.png
5269                     red-green.png
5270           gm composite -compose CopyBlue blue.png red-green.png
5271                     gm composite.png
5272
5273

OPTIONS

5275       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5276       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5277       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5278
5279       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5280
5281
5282       -authenticate <string>
5283              decrypt image with this password
5284
5285       -background <color>
5286              the background color
5287
5288       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5289              blue chromaticity primary point
5290
5291       -colors <value>
5292              preferred number of colors in the image
5293
5294       -colorspace <value>
5295              the type of colorspace
5296
5297       -comment <string>
5298              annotate an image with a comment
5299
5300       -compose <operator>
5301              the type of image composition
5302
5303       -compress <type>
5304              the type of image compression
5305
5306       -debug <events>
5307              enable debug printout
5308
5309       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5310              add coder/decoder specific options
5311
5312       -density <width>x<height>
5313              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5314
5315       -depth <value>
5316              depth of the image
5317
5318       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
5319              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
5320
5321       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5322              specifies the X server to contact
5323
5324       -dispose <method>
5325              GIF disposal method
5326
5327       -dissolve <percent>
5328              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
5329
5330       -dither
5331              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5332
5333       -encoding <type>
5334              specify the text encoding
5335
5336       -endian <type>
5337              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5338
5339       -filter <type>
5340              use this type of filter when resizing an image
5341
5342       -font <name>
5343              use this font when annotating the image with text
5344
5345       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
5346              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
5347
5348       -gravity <type>
5349              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
5350
5351       -green-primary <x>,<y>
5352              green chromaticity primary point
5353
5354       -help  print usage instructions
5355
5356       -interlace <type>
5357              the type of interlacing scheme
5358
5359       -label <name>
5360              assign a label to an image
5361
5362       -limit <type> <value>
5363              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
5364              resource limit
5365
5366       -log <string>
5367              Specify format for debug log
5368
5369       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5370
5371       -monitor
5372              show progress indication
5373
5374       -monochrome
5375              transform the image to black and white
5376
5377       -negate
5378              replace every pixel with its complementary color
5379
5380       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
5381              size and location of an image canvas
5382
5383       -profile <filename>
5384              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
5385
5386       -quality <value>
5387              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
5388
5389       -recolor <matrix>
5390              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
5391
5392       -red-primary <x>,<y>
5393              red chromaticity primary point
5394
5395       -render
5396              render vector operations
5397
5398       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
5399              Adjust image page offsets
5400
5401       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5402              resize an image
5403
5404       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
5405              rotate the image
5406
5407       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5408              chroma subsampling factors
5409
5410       -scene <value>
5411              set scene number
5412
5413       -set <attribute> <value>
5414              set an image attribute
5415
5416       +set <attribute>
5417              unset an image attribute
5418
5419       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
5420              sharpen the image
5421
5422       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5423              width and height of the image
5424
5425       -stegano <offset>
5426              hide watermark within an image
5427
5428       -stereo
5429              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
5430
5431       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
5432
5433       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5434              resize an image (quickly)
5435
5436       -treedepth <value>
5437              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
5438
5439       -trim  trim an image
5440
5441       -type <type>
5442              the image type
5443
5444       -units <type>
5445              the units of image resolution
5446
5447       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
5448              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
5449
5450       -verbose
5451              print detailed information about the image
5452
5453       -version
5454              print GraphicsMagick version string
5455
5456       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
5457              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
5458
5459       -white-point <x>,<y>
5460              chromaticity white point
5461
5462       -write <filename>
5463              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
5464
5465              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5466              above.
5467
5468

GM CONJURE

5470       The  Magick  scripting language (MSL) will primarily benefit those that
5471       want to accomplish custom image processing tasks but  do  not  wish  to
5472       program,  or  those  that do not have access to a Perl interpreter or a
5473       compiler.  The interpreter is called conjure and  here  is  an  example
5474       script:
5475
5476           <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5477           <image size="400x400" >
5478             <read filename="image.gif" />
5479             <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5480             <resize geometry="%[dimensions]" />
5481             <get width="width" height="height" />
5482             <print output=
5483               "Image sized from %[base-width]x%[base-height]
5484                to %[width]x%[height].\n" />
5485             <write filename="image.png" />
5486           </image>
5487
5488
5489       invoked with
5490
5491           gm conjure -dimensions 400x400 incantation.msl
5492
5493
5494       All operations will closely follow the key/value pairs defined in Perl‐
5495       Magick, unless otherwise noted.
5496

OPTIONS

5498       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5499       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
5500       specifying the option again with  a  different  effect,  or  if  it  is
5501       changed by a statement in the scripting language.
5502
5503       You  can  define your own keyword/value pairs on the command line.  The
5504       script can then use this information when setting values  by  including
5505       %[keyword]  in  the  string.  For example, if you included "-dimensions
5506       400x400" on the command line, as illustrated  above,  then  any  string
5507       containing   "%[dimensions]"   would  have  400x400  substituted.   The
5508       "%[string]" can be  used  either  an  entire  string,  such  as  geome‐
5509       try="%[dimensions]"  or as a part of a string such as filename="%[base‐
5510       name].png".
5511
5512       The keyword can be any string except for the following reserved strings
5513       (in any upper, lower, or mixed case variant): debug, help, and verbose,
5514       whose usage is described below.
5515
5516       The value can be any string.  If either the keyword or the  value  con‐
5517       tains  white  space  or  any symbols that have special meanings to your
5518       shell such as "#", "|", or "%", enclose the string in  quotation  marks
5519       or use "\" to escape the white space and special symbols.
5520
5521       Keywords  and values are case dependent.  "Key", "key", and "KEY" would
5522       be three different keywords.
5523
5524       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5525
5526
5527       -debug <events>
5528              enable debug printout
5529
5530       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5531              add coder/decoder specific options
5532
5533       -help  print usage instructions
5534
5535       -log <string>
5536              Specify format for debug log
5537
5538       -verbose
5539              print detailed information about the image
5540
5541       -version
5542              print GraphicsMagick version string
5543

MAGICK SCRIPTING LANGUAGE

5545       The Magick Scripting Language (MSL)  presently  defines  the  following
5546       elements and their attributes:
5547
5548               <image>
5549
5550                    background, color, id, size
5551
5552                    Define  a new image object.  </image> destroys it. Because
5553                    of this, if you wish  to  reference  multiple  "subimages"
5554                    (aka  pages  or  layers),  you can embed one image element
5555                    inside of another. For example:
5556
5557
5558
5559                        <image>
5560                        <read filename="input.png" />
5561                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5562                        <image height="base-height" width="base-width">
5563                        <image />
5564                        <write filename="output.mng" />
5565                        </image>
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570                        <image size="400x400" />
5571
5572
5573               <group>
5574
5575
5576                    Define a new group of image objects.  By  default,  images
5577                    are only valid for the life of their <image>element.
5578
5579
5580
5581                        <image>   -- creates the image
5582                        .....     -- do stuff with it
5583                        </image>  -- dispose of the image
5584
5585
5586
5587                    However,  in  a  group, all images in that group will stay
5588                    around for the life of the group:
5589
5590
5591
5592                        <group>                           -- start a group
5593                            <image>                       -- create an image
5594                            ....                          -- do stuff
5595                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5596                            <image>                        --  create  another
5597                    image
5598                            ....                          -- do more stuff
5599                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5600                            <write filename="image.mng" />  -- output
5601                        </group>                           --  dispose of both
5602                    images
5603
5604
5605               <read>
5606
5607                        filename
5608
5609                    Read a new image from a disk file.
5610
5611
5612
5613                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5614
5615
5616
5617                    To read two images use
5618
5619
5620
5621                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5622                        <read filename="image.png />
5623
5624
5625               <write>
5626
5627                        filename
5628                    Write the image(s) to disk, either as a  single  multiple-
5629                    image file or multiple ones if necessary.
5630
5631
5632
5633                         <write filename=image.tiff" />
5634
5635               <get>
5636
5637                    Get   any  attribute  recognized  by  PerlMagick's  GetAt‐
5638                    tribute() and stores it as an image  attribute  for  later
5639                    use. Currently only width and height are supported.
5640
5641
5642                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5643                        <print  output="Image  size  is  %[base-width]x%[base-
5644                    height].\n" />
5645
5646
5647               <set>
5648
5649                    background, bordercolor, clip-mask,  colorspace,  density,
5650                    magick,  mattecolor, opacity.  Set an attribute recognized
5651                    by PerlMagick's GetAttribute().
5652               <profile>
5653
5654                        [profilename]
5655
5656                    Read one or more IPTC, ICC or generic profiles  from  file
5657                    and assign to image
5658
5659
5660
5661                        <profile iptc="profile.iptc" generic="generic.dat" />
5662
5663
5664
5665                    To remove a specified profile use "!" as the filename eg
5666
5667
5668
5669                        <profile icm="!" iptc="profile.iptc" />
5670
5671
5672               <border>
5673
5674                        fill, geometry, height, width
5675               <blur>
5676
5677                        radius, sigma
5678               <charcoal>
5679
5680                        radius, sigma
5681               <chop>
5682
5683                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5684               <crop>
5685
5686                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5687               <composite>
5688
5689                        compose, geometry, gravity, image, x, y
5690
5691
5692                        <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5693                        <group>
5694                            <image id="image_01">
5695                                <read filename="cloud3.gif"/>
5696                                <resize geometry="250x90"/>
5697                            </image>
5698                            <image id="image_02">
5699                                <read filename="cloud4.gif"/>
5700                                <resize geometry="190x100"/>
5701                            </image>
5702                            <image>
5703                                <read filename="background.jpg"/>
5704                                <composite       image="image_01"       geome‐
5705                    try="+740+470"/>
5706                                <composite       image="image_02"       geome‐
5707                    try="+390+415"/>
5708                            </image>
5709                            <write filename="result.png"/>
5710                        </group>
5711
5712
5713               <despeckle>
5714
5715               <emboss>
5716
5717                        radius, sigma
5718               <enhance>
5719
5720               <equalize>
5721
5722               <edge>
5723
5724                        radius
5725               <flip>
5726
5727               <flop>
5728
5729               <frame>
5730
5731                        fill, geometry, height, width, x, y, inner, outer
5732               <flatten>
5733
5734               <get>
5735
5736                        height, width
5737               <gamma>
5738
5739                        red, green, blue
5740               <image>
5741
5742                        background, color, id, size
5743               <implode>
5744
5745                        amount
5746               <magnify>
5747
5748               <minify>
5749
5750               <medianfilter>
5751
5752                        radius
5753               <normalize>
5754
5755               <oilpaint>
5756
5757                        radius
5758               <print>
5759
5760                        output
5761               <profile>
5762
5763                        [profilename]
5764               <read>
5765
5766               <resize>
5767
5768                        blur, filter, geometry, height, width
5769               <roll>
5770
5771                        geometry, x, y
5772               <rotate>
5773
5774                        degrees
5775               <reducenoise>
5776
5777                        radius
5778               <sample>
5779
5780                        geometry, height, width
5781               <scale>
5782
5783                        geometry, height, width
5784               <sharpen>
5785
5786                        radius, sigma
5787               <shave>
5788
5789                        geometry, height, width
5790               <shear>
5791
5792                        x, y
5793               <solarize>
5794
5795                        threshold
5796               <spread>
5797
5798                        radius
5799               <stegano>
5800
5801                        image
5802               <stereo>
5803
5804                        image
5805               <swirl>
5806
5807                        degrees
5808               <texture>
5809
5810                        image
5811               <threshold>
5812
5813                        threshold
5814               <transparent>
5815
5816                        color
5817               <trim>
5818
5819
5820

GM CONVERT

5822       Convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
5823       with a differing image format. In addition, various types of image pro‐
5824       cessing  can  be performed on the converted image during the conversion
5825       process. Convert recognizes the image formats  listed  in  GraphicsMag‐
5826       ick(1).
5827
5828

EXAMPLES

5830       To make a thumbnail of a JPEG image, use:
5831
5832           gm convert -size 120x120 cockatoo.jpg -resize 120x120
5833                   +profile "*" thumbnail.jpg
5834
5835
5836       In  this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
5837       the image is going to be downscaled to  120x120,  allowing  it  to  run
5838       faster  by  avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
5839       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
5840       the  desired  dimensions of the output image.  It will be scaled so its
5841       largest dimension is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes  any  ICM,
5842       EXIF,  IPTC,  or  other profiles that might be present in the input and
5843       aren't needed in the thumbnail.
5844
5845       To convert a MIFF image of a cockatoo to a SUN raster image, use:
5846
5847           gm convert cockatoo.miff sun:cockatoo.ras
5848
5849
5850       To convert a multi-page PostScript document to  individual  FAX  pages,
5851       use:
5852
5853           gm convert -monochrome document.ps fax:page
5854
5855
5856       To  convert  a TIFF image to a PostScript A4 page with the image in the
5857       lower left-hand corner, use:
5858
5859           gm convert -page A4+0+0 image.tiff document.ps
5860
5861
5862       To convert a raw Gray image with  a  128  byte  header  to  a  portable
5863       graymap, use:
5864
5865           gm convert -depth 8 -size 768x512+128 gray:raw
5866                   image.pgm
5867
5868
5869       In  this example, "raw" is the input file.  Its format is "gray" and it
5870       has the dimensions and number of header bytes specified  by  the  -size
5871       option and the sample depth specified by the -depth option.  The output
5872       file is "image.pgm".  The suffix ".pgm" specifies its format.
5873
5874       To convert a Photo CD image to a TIFF image, use:
5875
5876           gm convert -size 1536x1024 img0009.pcd image.tiff
5877           gm convert img0009.pcd[4] image.tiff
5878
5879
5880       To create a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
5881
5882           gm convert 'vid:*.jpg' directory.miff
5883
5884
5885       To annotate an image with  blue  text  using  font  12x24  at  position
5886       (100,100), use:
5887
5888           gm convert -font helvetica -fill blue
5889                   -draw "text 100,100 Cockatoo"
5890                   bird.jpg bird.miff
5891
5892
5893       To tile a 640x480 image with a JPEG texture with bumps use:
5894
5895           gm convert -size 640x480 tile:bumps.jpg tiled.png
5896
5897
5898       To  surround  an  icon with an ornamental border to use with Mosaic(1),
5899       use:
5900
5901           gm convert -mattecolor "#697B8F" -frame 6x6 bird.jpg
5902                   icon.png
5903
5904
5905       To create a MNG animation from a DNA molecule sequence, use:
5906
5907           gm convert -delay 20 dna.* dna.mng
5908
5909

OPTIONS

5911       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5912       the  command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
5913       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option  or  -noop.
5914       Some  options  only  affect  the decoding of images and others only the
5915       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
5916
5917       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5918
5919
5920       -adjoin
5921              join images into a single multi-image file
5922
5923       -affine <matrix>
5924              drawing transform matrix
5925
5926       -antialias
5927              remove pixel aliasing
5928
5929       -append
5930              append a set of images
5931
5932        -asc-cdl <spec>
5933              apply ASC CDL color transform
5934
5935       -authenticate <string>
5936              decrypt image with this password
5937
5938       -auto-orient
5939              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5940
5941       -average
5942              average a set of images
5943
5944       -background <color>
5945              the background color
5946
5947       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
5948              pixels below the threshold become black
5949
5950       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5951              blue chromaticity primary point
5952
5953       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
5954              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
5955
5956       -border <width>x<height>
5957              surround the image with a border of color
5958
5959       -bordercolor <color>
5960              the border color
5961
5962       -box <color>
5963              set the color of the annotation bounding box
5964
5965       -channel <type>
5966              the type of channel
5967
5968       -charcoal <factor>
5969              simulate a charcoal drawing
5970
5971       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5972              remove pixels from the interior of an image
5973
5974       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
5975
5976       -coalesce
5977              merge a sequence of images
5978
5979       -colorize <value>
5980              colorize the image with the pen color
5981
5982       -colors <value>
5983              preferred number of colors in the image
5984
5985       -colorspace <value>
5986              the type of colorspace
5987
5988       -comment <string>
5989              annotate an image with a comment
5990
5991       -compose <operator>
5992              the type of image composition
5993
5994       -compress <type>
5995              the type of image compression
5996
5997       -contrast
5998              enhance or reduce the image contrast
5999
6000       -convolve <kernel>
6001              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
6002
6003       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6004              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6005
6006       -cycle <amount>
6007              displace image colormap by amount
6008
6009       -debug <events>
6010              enable debug printout
6011
6012       -deconstruct
6013              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
6014
6015       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6016              add coder/decoder specific options
6017
6018       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6019              display the next image after pausing
6020
6021       -density <width>x<height>
6022              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6023
6024       -depth <value>
6025              depth of the image
6026
6027       -despeckle
6028              reduce the speckles within an image
6029
6030       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6031              specifies the X server to contact
6032
6033       -dispose <method>
6034              GIF disposal method
6035
6036       -dither
6037              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6038
6039       -draw <string>
6040              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
6041
6042       -edge <radius>
6043              detect edges within an image
6044
6045       -emboss <radius>
6046              emboss an image
6047
6048       -encoding <type>
6049              specify the text encoding
6050
6051       -endian <type>
6052              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6053
6054       -enhance
6055              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6056
6057       -equalize
6058              perform histogram equalization to the image
6059
6060       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6061              composite image on background color canvas image
6062
6063       -fill <color>
6064              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
6065
6066       -filter <type>
6067              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6068
6069       -flatten
6070              flatten a sequence of images
6071
6072       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6073
6074       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6075
6076       -font <name>
6077              use this font when annotating the image with text
6078
6079       -format <string>
6080              output formatted image characteristics
6081
6082       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6083              surround the image with an ornamental border
6084
6085       -fuzz <distance>{%}
6086              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
6087
6088       -gamma <value>
6089              level of gamma correction
6090
6091       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
6092              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
6093
6094       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6095              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6096
6097       -gravity <type>
6098              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
6099
6100       -green-primary <x>,<y>
6101              green chromaticity primary point
6102
6103       -hald-clut <clut>
6104              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
6105
6106       -help  print usage instructions
6107
6108       -implode <factor>
6109              implode image pixels about the center
6110
6111       -intent <type>
6112              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
6113
6114       -interlace <type>
6115              the type of interlacing scheme
6116
6117       -label <name>
6118              assign a label to an image
6119
6120       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
6121              perform local adaptive thresholding
6122
6123       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
6124              adjust the level of image contrast
6125
6126       -limit <type> <value>
6127              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
6128              resource limit
6129
6130       -list <type>
6131              the type of list
6132
6133       -log <string>
6134              Specify format for debug log
6135
6136       -loop <iterations>
6137              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
6138
6139       -magnify
6140              magnify the image
6141
6142       -map <filename>
6143              choose a particular set of colors from this image
6144
6145       -mask <filename>
6146              Specify a clipping mask
6147
6148       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6149
6150       -mattecolor <color>
6151              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6152
6153       -median <radius>
6154              apply a median filter to the image
6155
6156       -minify <factor>
6157              minify the image
6158
6159       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
6160              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
6161
6162       -monitor
6163              show progress indication
6164
6165       -monochrome
6166              transform the image to black and white
6167
6168       -morph <frames>
6169              morphs an image sequence
6170
6171       -mosaic
6172              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
6173
6174       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
6175              Simulate motion blur
6176
6177       -negate
6178              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6179
6180       -noise <radius|type>
6181              add or reduce noise in an image
6182
6183       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6184
6185       -normalize
6186              transform image to span the full range of color values
6187
6188       -opaque <color>
6189              change this color to the pen color within the image
6190
6191       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
6192              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
6193              channel
6194
6195       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
6196              ordered dither the image
6197
6198       -orient <orientation>
6199              Set the image orientation attribute
6200
6201       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6202              size and location of an image canvas
6203
6204       -paint <radius>
6205              simulate an oil painting
6206
6207       -pen <color>
6208              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
6209
6210       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
6211
6212       -pointsize <value>
6213              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
6214
6215       -preview <type>
6216              image preview type
6217
6218       -process <command>
6219              process a sequence of images using a process module
6220
6221       -profile <filename>
6222              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
6223
6224       -quality <value>
6225              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6226
6227       -raise <width>x<height>
6228              lighten or darken image edges
6229
6230       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
6231              random threshold the image
6232
6233       -recolor <matrix>
6234              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
6235
6236       -red-primary <x>,<y>
6237              red chromaticity primary point
6238
6239       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6240              apply options to a portion of the image
6241
6242       -render
6243              render vector operations
6244
6245       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
6246              Adjust image page offsets
6247
6248       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
6249              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
6250
6251       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6252              resize an image
6253
6254       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6255              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6256
6257       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6258              rotate the image
6259
6260       -sample <geometry>
6261              scale image using pixel sampling
6262
6263       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6264              chroma subsampling factors
6265
6266       -scale <geometry>
6267              scale the image.
6268
6269       -scene <value>
6270              set scene number
6271
6272       -set <attribute> <value>
6273              set an image attribute
6274
6275       +set <attribute>
6276              unset an image attribute
6277
6278       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6279              segment an image
6280
6281       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
6282              shade the image using a distant light source
6283
6284       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6285              sharpen the image
6286
6287       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
6288              shave pixels from the image edges
6289
6290       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
6291              shear the image along the X or Y axis
6292
6293       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6294              width and height of the image
6295
6296       -solarize <factor>
6297              negate all pixels above the threshold level
6298
6299       -spread <amount>
6300              displace image pixels by a random amount
6301
6302       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
6303
6304       -stroke <color>
6305              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
6306
6307       -strokewidth <value>
6308              set the stroke width
6309
6310       -swirl <degrees>
6311              swirl image pixels about the center
6312
6313       -texture <filename>
6314              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6315
6316       -threshold <value>{%}
6317              threshold the image
6318
6319       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6320              resize an image (quickly)
6321
6322       -tile <filename>
6323              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
6324
6325       -transform
6326              transform the image
6327
6328       -transparent <color>
6329              make this color transparent within the image
6330
6331       -treedepth <value>
6332              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6333
6334       -trim  trim an image
6335
6336       -type <type>
6337              the image type
6338
6339       -units <type>
6340              the units of image resolution
6341
6342       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
6343              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
6344
6345       -use-pixmap
6346              use the pixmap
6347
6348       -verbose
6349              print detailed information about the image
6350
6351       -version
6352              print GraphicsMagick version string
6353
6354       -view <string>
6355              FlashPix viewing parameters
6356
6357       -virtual-pixel <method>
6358              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
6359
6360       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
6361              alter an image along a sine wave
6362
6363       -white-point <x>,<y>
6364              chromaticity white point
6365
6366       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
6367              pixels above the threshold become white
6368
6369       -write <filename>
6370              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
6371
6372              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
6373              above.
6374

GM DISPLAY

6376       Display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
6377       play program. It can display an image on any workstation screen running
6378       an  X server. Display can read and write many of the more popular image
6379       formats (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNM, Photo CD, etc.).
6380
6381       With display, you can perform these functions on an image:
6382
6383                o  load an image from a file
6384                o  display the next image
6385                o  display the former image
6386                o  display a sequence of images as a slide show
6387                o  write the image to a file
6388                o  print the image to a PostScript printer
6389                o  delete the image file
6390                o  create a Visual Image Directory
6391                o  select the image to display by its  thumbnail  rather  than
6392               name
6393                o  undo last image transformation
6394                o  copy a region of the image
6395                o  paste a region to the image
6396                o  restore the image to its original size
6397                o  refresh the image
6398                o  half the image size
6399                o  double the image size
6400                o  resize the image
6401                o  crop the image
6402                o  cut the image
6403                o  flop image in the horizontal direction
6404                o  flip image in the vertical direction
6405                o  rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise
6406                o  rotate the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise
6407                o  rotate the image
6408                o  shear the image
6409                o  roll the image
6410                o  trim the image edges
6411                o  invert the colors of the image
6412                o  vary the color brightness
6413                o  vary the color saturation
6414                o  vary the image hue
6415                o  gamma correct the image
6416                o  sharpen the image contrast
6417                o  dull the image contrast
6418                o  perform histogram equalization on the image
6419                o  perform histogram normalization on the image
6420                o  negate the image colors
6421                o  convert the image to grayscale
6422                o  set the maximum number of unique colors in the image
6423                o  reduce the speckles within an image
6424                o  eliminate peak noise from an image
6425                o  detect edges within the image
6426                o  emboss an image
6427                o  segment the image by color
6428                o  simulate an oil painting
6429                o  simulate a charcoal drawing
6430                o  annotate the image with text
6431                o  draw on the image
6432                o  edit an image pixel color
6433                o  edit the image matte information
6434                o  composite an image with another
6435                o  add a border to the image
6436                o  surround image with an ornamental border
6437                o  apply image processing techniques to a region of interest
6438                o  display information about the image
6439                o  zoom a portion of the image
6440                o  show a histogram of the image
6441                o  display image to background of a window
6442                o  set user preferences
6443                o  display information about this program
6444                o  discard all images and exit program
6445                o  change the level of magnification
6446                o   display images specified by a World Wide Web (WWW) uniform
6447               resource locator (URL)
6448
6449

EXAMPLES

6451       To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and  480
6452       pixels in height and position the window at location (200,200), use:
6453
6454           gm display -geometry 640x480+200+200! cockatoo.miff
6455
6456
6457       To  display an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
6458       drop, use:
6459
6460           gm display +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.miff
6461
6462
6463       To tile a slate texture onto the root window, use:
6464
6465           gm display -size 1280x1024 -window root slate.png
6466
6467
6468       To display a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
6469
6470           gm display 'vid:*.jpg'
6471
6472
6473       To display a MAP image that is 640 pixels in width and  480  pixels  in
6474       height with 256 colors, use:
6475
6476           gm display -size 640x480+256 cockatoo.map
6477
6478
6479       To display an image of a cockatoo specified with a World Wide Web (WWW)
6480       uniform resource locator (URL), use:
6481
6482           gm display ftp://wizards.dupont.com/images/cockatoo.jpg
6483
6484
6485       To display histogram of an image, use:
6486
6487           gm gm convert file.jpg HISTOGRAM:- | gm display -
6488
6489

OPTIONS

6491       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
6492       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
6493       specifying the option again with a different  effect.  For  example  to
6494       display  three  images,  the  first  with 32 colors, the second with an
6495       unlimited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
6496
6497           gm display -colors 32 cockatoo.miff -noop duck.miff
6498                        -colors 16 macaw.miff
6499
6500
6501       Display options can appear on the command line or in your  X  resources
6502       file.  See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
6503       in your X resources file.
6504
6505       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
6506
6507
6508       -authenticate <string>
6509              decrypt image with this password
6510
6511       -backdrop
6512              display the image centered on a backdrop.
6513
6514       -background <color>
6515              the background color
6516
6517       -border <width>x<height>
6518              surround the image with a border of color
6519
6520       -bordercolor <color>
6521              the border color
6522
6523       -borderwidth <geometry>
6524              the border width
6525
6526       -colormap <type>
6527              define the colormap type
6528
6529       -colors <value>
6530              preferred number of colors in the image
6531
6532       -colorspace <value>
6533              the type of colorspace
6534
6535       -comment <string>
6536              annotate an image with a comment
6537
6538       -compress <type>
6539              the type of image compression
6540
6541       -contrast
6542              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6543
6544       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6545              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6546
6547       -debug <events>
6548              enable debug printout
6549
6550       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6551              add coder/decoder specific options
6552
6553       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6554              display the next image after pausing
6555
6556       -density <width>x<height>
6557              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6558
6559       -depth <value>
6560              depth of the image
6561
6562       -despeckle
6563              reduce the speckles within an image
6564
6565       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6566              specifies the X server to contact
6567
6568       -dispose <method>
6569              GIF disposal method
6570
6571       -dither
6572              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6573
6574       -edge <radius>
6575              detect edges within an image
6576
6577       -endian <type>
6578              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6579
6580       -enhance
6581              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6582
6583       -filter <type>
6584              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6585
6586       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6587
6588       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6589
6590       -font <name>
6591              use this font when annotating the image with text
6592
6593       -foreground <color>
6594              define the foreground color
6595
6596       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6597              surround the image with an ornamental border
6598
6599       -gamma <value>
6600              level of gamma correction
6601
6602       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6603              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6604
6605       -help  print usage instructions
6606
6607       -iconGeometry <geometry>
6608              specify the icon geometry
6609
6610       -iconic
6611              iconic animation
6612
6613       -immutable
6614              make image immutable
6615
6616       -interlace <type>
6617              the type of interlacing scheme
6618
6619       -label <name>
6620              assign a label to an image
6621
6622       -limit <type> <value>
6623              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
6624              resource limit
6625
6626       -log <string>
6627              Specify format for debug log
6628
6629       -magnify <factor>
6630              magnify the image
6631
6632       -map <type>
6633              display image using this type.
6634
6635       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6636
6637       -mattecolor <color>
6638              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6639
6640       -monitor
6641              show progress indication
6642
6643       -monochrome
6644              transform the image to black and white
6645
6646       -name  name an image
6647
6648       -negate
6649              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6650
6651       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6652
6653       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6654              size and location of an image canvas
6655
6656       +progress
6657              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
6658
6659       -quality <value>
6660              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6661
6662       -raise <width>x<height>
6663              lighten or darken image edges
6664
6665       -remote
6666              perform a X11 remote operation
6667
6668       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6669              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6670
6671       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6672              rotate the image
6673
6674       -sample <geometry>
6675              scale image using pixel sampling
6676
6677       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6678              chroma subsampling factors
6679
6680       -scenes <value-value>
6681              range of image scene numbers to read
6682
6683       -set <attribute> <value>
6684              set an image attribute
6685
6686       +set <attribute>
6687              unset an image attribute
6688
6689       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6690              segment an image
6691
6692       -shared-memory
6693              use shared memory
6694
6695       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6696              sharpen the image
6697
6698       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6699              width and height of the image
6700
6701       -text-font <name>
6702              font for writing fixed-width text
6703
6704       -texture <filename>
6705              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6706
6707       -title <string>
6708              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
6709
6710       -treedepth <value>
6711              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6712
6713       -trim  trim an image
6714
6715       -type <type>
6716              the image type
6717
6718       -update <seconds>
6719               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
6720
6721       -use-pixmap
6722              use the pixmap
6723
6724       -verbose
6725              print detailed information about the image
6726
6727       -version
6728              print GraphicsMagick version string
6729
6730       -visual <type>
6731              animate images using this X visual type
6732
6733       -window <id>
6734              make image the background of a window
6735
6736       -window-group
6737              specify the window group
6738
6739       -write <filename>
6740              write the image to a file [display]
6741
6742              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
6743              above.
6744
6745

MOUSE BUTTONS

6747       The effects of each button press is described below. Three buttons  are
6748       required.  If you have a two button mouse, button 1 and 3 are returned.
6749       Press ALT and button 3 to simulate button 2.
6750
6751       1       Press this button to map or unmap the Command widget . See  the
6752              next section for more information about the Command widget.
6753
6754       2       Press and drag to define a region of the image to magnify.
6755
6756       3        Press  and drag to choose from a select set of display(1) com‐
6757              mands. This button behaves differently if the image  being  dis‐
6758              played  is a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of
6759              the directory and press this button and drag to select a command
6760              from a pop-up menu.  Choose from these menu items:
6761
6762                  Open
6763                  Next
6764                  Former
6765                  Delete
6766                  Update
6767
6768
6769              If  you  choose  Open, the image represented by the tile is dis‐
6770              played.  To return to the visual image  directory,  choose  Next
6771              from  the  Command  widget  (refer to Command Widget).  Next and
6772              Former moves to the next or former  image  respectively.  Choose
6773              Delete to delete a particular image tile. Finally, choose Update
6774              to synchronize all the image tiles with their respective images.
6775              See montage and miff for more details.
6776

COMMAND WIDGET

6778       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
6779
6780           File
6781
6782           Open...
6783           Next
6784           Former
6785           Select...
6786           Save...
6787           Print...
6788           Delete...
6789           Canvas...
6790           Visual Directory...
6791           Quit
6792
6793
6794
6795           Edit
6796
6797           Undo
6798           Redo
6799           Cut
6800           Copy
6801           Paste
6802
6803
6804
6805           View
6806
6807           Half Size
6808           Original Size
6809           Double Size
6810           Resize...
6811           Apply
6812           Refresh
6813           Restore
6814
6815
6816
6817           Transform
6818
6819           Crop
6820           Chop
6821           Flop
6822           Flip
6823           Rotate Right
6824           Rotate Left
6825           Rotate...
6826           Shear...
6827           Roll...
6828           Trim Edges
6829
6830
6831
6832           Enhance
6833
6834           Hue...
6835           Saturation...
6836           Brightness...
6837           Gamma...
6838           Spiff...
6839           Dull
6840           Equalize
6841           Normalize
6842           Negate
6843           GRAYscale
6844           Quantize...
6845
6846
6847
6848           Effects
6849
6850           Despeckle
6851           Emboss
6852           Reduce Noise
6853           Add Noise
6854           Sharpen...
6855           Blur...
6856           Threshold...
6857           Edge Detect...
6858           Spread...
6859           Shade...
6860           Raise...
6861           Segment...
6862
6863
6864
6865           F/X
6866
6867           Solarize...
6868           Swirl...
6869           Implode...
6870           Wave...
6871           Oil Paint...
6872           Charcoal Draw...
6873
6874
6875
6876           Image Edit
6877
6878           Annotate...
6879           Draw...
6880           Color...
6881           Matte...
6882           Composite...
6883           Add Border...
6884           Add Frame...
6885           Comment...
6886           Launch...
6887           Region of Interest...
6888
6889
6890
6891           Miscellany
6892
6893           Image Info
6894           Zoom Image
6895           Show Preview...
6896           Show Histogram
6897           Show Matte
6898           Background...
6899           Slide Show
6900           Preferences...
6901
6902
6903
6904           Help
6905
6906           Overview
6907           Browse Documentation
6908           About Display
6909
6910
6911
6912       Menu  items  with  a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
6913       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
6914       pointer  to  the appropriate menu and press button 1 and drag. When you
6915       find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the  command  is
6916       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
6917       execute a particular command.
6918

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

6920       Accelerators are one or two key presses that effect a  particular  com‐
6921       mand.  The keyboard accelerators that display understands is:
6922
6923           Ctl+O     Press to load an image from a file.
6924           space     Press to display the next image.
6925
6926
6927       If  the  image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6928       you can skip ahead several pages by preceding this command with a  num‐
6929       ber.   For  example to display the fourth page beyond the current page,
6930       press 4space.
6931
6932           backspace Press to display the former image.
6933
6934
6935       If the image is a multi-paged document such as a  PostScript  document,
6936       you can skip behind several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6937       ber.  For example to display the  fourth  page  preceding  the  current
6938       page, press 4n.
6939
6940           Ctl-S    Press to save the image to a file.
6941           Ctl-P    Press to print the image to a
6942                    PostScript printer.
6943           Ctl-D    Press to delete an image file.
6944           Ctl-N    Press to create a blank canvas.
6945           Ctl-Q    Press to discard all images and exit program.
6946           Ctl+Z    Press to undo last image transformation.
6947           Ctl+R    Press to redo last image transformation.
6948           Ctl-X    Press to cut a region of
6949                    the image.
6950           Ctl-C    Press to copy a region of
6951                    the image.
6952           Ctl-V    Press to paste a region to
6953                    the image.
6954           <        Press to halve the image size.
6955           .        Press to return to the original image size.
6956           >        Press to double the image size.
6957           %        Press to resize the image to a width and height
6958                    you specify.
6959           Cmd-A    Press to make any image transformations
6960                    permanent.
6961                    By default, any image size transformations are
6962                    applied to the original image to create the
6963                    image displayed on the X server.  However, the
6964                    transformations are not permanent (i.e. the
6965                    original image does not change size only the
6966                    X image does). For example, if you press ">"
6967                    the X image will appear to double in size, but
6968                    the original image will in fact remain the same
6969                    size.  To force the original image to double in
6970                    size, press ">" followed by "Cmd-A".
6971           @        Press to refresh the image window.
6972           C        Press to crop the image.
6973           [        Press to chop the image.
6974           H        Press to flop image in the horizontal direction.
6975           V        Press to flip image in the vertical direction.
6976           /        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
6977           \        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees
6978                    counter-clockwise.
6979           *        Press to rotate the image
6980                    the number of degrees you specify.
6981           S        Press to shear the image the number of degrees
6982                    you specify.
6983           R        Press to roll the image.
6984           T        Press to trim the image edges.
6985           Shft-H   Press to vary the color hue.
6986           Shft-S   Press to vary the color saturation.
6987           Shft-L   Press to vary the image brightness.
6988           Shft-G   Press to gamma correct the image.
6989           Shft-C   Press to spiff up the image contrast.
6990           Shft-Z   Press to dull the image contrast.
6991           =        Press to perform histogram equalization on
6992                    the image.
6993           Shft-N   Press to perform histogram normalization on
6994                    the image.
6995           Shft-~   Press to negate the colors of the image.
6996           .        Press to convert the image colors to gray.
6997           Shft-#   Press to set the maximum number of unique
6998                    colors in the image.
6999           F2       Press to reduce the speckles in an image.
7000           F2       Press to emboss an image.
7001           F4       Press to eliminate peak noise from an image.
7002           F5       Press to add noise to an image.
7003           F6       Press to sharpen an image.
7004           F7       Press to blur image an image.
7005           F8       Press to threshold the image.
7006           F9       Press to detect edges within an image.
7007           F10      Press to displace pixels by a random amount.
7008           F11      Press to shade the image using a distant light
7009                    source.
7010           F12      Press to lighten or darken image edges to
7011                    create a 3-D effect.
7012           F13      Press to segment the image by color.
7013           Meta-S   Press to swirl image pixels about the center.
7014           Meta-I   Press to implode image pixels about the center.
7015           Meta-W   Press to alter an image along a sine wave.
7016           Meta-P   Press to simulate an oil painting.
7017           Meta-C   Press to simulate a charcoal drawing.
7018           Alt-X    Press to composite the image
7019                    with another.
7020           Alt-A    Press to annotate the image with text.
7021           Alt-D    Press to draw a line on the image.
7022           Alt-P    Press to edit an image pixel color.
7023           Alt-M    Press to edit the image matte information.
7024           Alt-X    Press to composite the image with another.
7025           Alt-A    Press to add a border to the image.
7026           Alt-F    Press to add a ornamental frame to the image.
7027           Alt-Shft-!   Press to add an image comment.
7028           Ctl-A    Press to apply image processing techniques to a
7029                    region of interest.
7030           Shft-?   Press to display information about the image.
7031           Shft-+   Press to map the zoom image window.
7032           Shft-P   Press to preview an image enhancement, effect,
7033                    or f/x.
7034           F1       Press to display helpful information about
7035                    the "display" utility.
7036           Find     Press to browse documentation about
7037                    GraphicsMagick.
7038           1-9      Press to change the level of magnification.
7039
7040
7041       Use the arrow keys to move the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
7042       within the magnify window. Be sure to first map the magnify  window  by
7043       pressing button 2.
7044
7045       Press ALT and one of the arrow keys to trim off one pixel from any side
7046       of the image.
7047

X RESOURCES

7049       Display options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
7050       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
7051       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
7052
7053       Most display options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, dis‐
7054       play uses the following X resources:
7055
7056       background (class Background)
7057               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window back‐
7058              ground. The default is #ccc.
7059
7060       borderColor (class BorderColor)
7061               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window  bor‐
7062              der. The default is #ccc.
7063
7064       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
7065                Specifies  the width in pixels of the image window border. The
7066              default is 2.
7067
7068       browseCommand (class browseCommand)
7069               Specifies the name of the  preferred  browser  when  displaying
7070              GraphicsMagick documentation. The default is netscape %s.
7071
7072       confirmExit (class ConfirmExit)
7073                Display  pops  up  a dialog box to confirm exiting the program
7074              when exiting the program. Set this resource  to  False  to  exit
7075              without a confirmation.
7076
7077       displayGamma (class DisplayGamma)
7078                Specifies  the  gamma of the X server.  You can apply separate
7079              gamma values to the red, green, and blue channels of  the  image
7080              with   a   gamma   value  list  delineated  with  slashes  (i.e.
7081              1.7/2.3/1.2).  The default is 2.2.
7082
7083       displayWarnings (class DisplayWarnings)
7084               Display pops up a dialog box whenever a warning message occurs.
7085              Set this resource to False to ignore warning messages.
7086
7087       font (class FontList)
7088                Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal for‐
7089              matted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
7090
7091       font[1-9] (class Font[1-9])
7092               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when annotating
7093              the  image  window with text. The default fonts are fixed, vari‐
7094              able, 5x8, 6x10, 7x13bold, 8x13bold, 9x15bold, 10x20, and 12x24.
7095
7096       foreground (class Foreground)
7097               Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the  image
7098              window.  The default is black.
7099
7100       gammaCorrect (class gammaCorrect)
7101                This  resource,  if  true,  will lighten or darken an image of
7102              known gamma to match the gamma of the display (see resource dis‐
7103              playGamma). The default is True.
7104
7105       geometry (class Geometry)
7106                Specifies the preferred size and position of the image window.
7107              It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers.
7108
7109              Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.   A  negative  x
7110              offset  is  measured  from  the  right edge of the screen to the
7111              right edge of the icon, and a negative y offset is measured from
7112              the bottom edge of the screen to the bottom edge of the icon.
7113
7114       iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
7115                Specifies  the  preferred size and position of the application
7116              when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
7117              agers.
7118
7119              Offsets,  if present, are handled in the same manner as in class
7120              Geometry.
7121
7122       iconic (class Iconic)
7123               This resource indicates that you would prefer that the applica‐
7124              tion's windows initially not be visible as if the windows had be
7125              immediately iconified by you. Window managers may choose not  to
7126              honor the application's request.
7127
7128       magnify (class Magnify)
7129                specifies  an  integral  factor  by  which the image should be
7130              enlarged. The default is 3.  This value only affects the  magni‐
7131              fication  window which is invoked with button number 3 after the
7132              image is displayed.
7133
7134       matteColor (class MatteColor)
7135               Specify the color of windows. It is used for the backgrounds of
7136              windows,  menus,  and  notices. A 3D effect is achieved by using
7137              highlight and shadow colors derived  from  this  color.  Default
7138              value: #697B8F.
7139
7140       name (class Name)
7141                This resource specifies the name under which resources for the
7142              application should be found. This resource is  useful  in  shell
7143              aliases  to  distinguish  between invocations of an application,
7144              without resorting to creating links to alter the executable file
7145              name. The default is the application name.
7146
7147       pen[1-9] (class Pen[1-9])
7148                Specifies the color of the preferred font to use when annotat‐
7149              ing the image window with text. The default  colors  are  black,
7150              blue, green, cyan, gray, red, magenta, yellow, and white.
7151
7152       printCommand (class PrintCommand)
7153               This command is executed whenever Print is issued.  In general,
7154              it is the command to print PostScript to your  printer.  Default
7155              value: lp -c -s %i.
7156
7157       sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
7158                This  resource  specifies  whether  display should attempt use
7159              shared memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled  with
7160              shared  memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
7161              extension. Otherwise, this resource is ignored. The  default  is
7162              True.
7163
7164       textFont (class textFont)
7165               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
7166              writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
7167
7168       title (class Title)
7169               This resource specifies the title to be used for the image win‐
7170              dow.  This  information is sometimes used by a window manager to
7171              provide a header identifying the  window.  The  default  is  the
7172              image file name.
7173
7174       undoCache (class UndoCache)
7175               Specifies, in mega-bytes, the amount of memory in the undo edit
7176              cache.  Each time you modify the image it is saved in  the  undo
7177              edit  cache as long as memory is available. You can subsequently
7178              undo one or more of these transformations.  The  default  is  16
7179              Megabytes.
7180
7181       usePixmap (class UsePixmap)
7182               Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this resource
7183              to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This option is  use‐
7184              ful  if  your image exceeds the dimensions of your server screen
7185              and you intend to pan the image. Panning  is  much  faster  with
7186              Pixmaps  than  with  a XImage. Pixmaps are considered a precious
7187              resource, use them with discretion.
7188
7189              To set the geometry of the Magnify or Pan  or  window,  use  the
7190              geometry  resource.  For example, to set the Pan window geometry
7191              to 256x256, use:
7192
7193                  gm display.pan.geometry: 256x256
7194
7195

IMAGE LOADING

7197       To select an image to display, choose Open of the  File  sub-menu  from
7198       the  Command widget. A file browser is displayed.  To choose a particu‐
7199       lar image file, move the pointer to the filename and press any  button.
7200       The  filename  is  copied to the text window. Next, press Open or press
7201       the RETURN key.  Alternatively,  you  can  type  the  image  file  name
7202       directly  into the text window. To descend directories, choose a direc‐
7203       tory name and press the button twice  quickly.  A  scrollbar  allows  a
7204       large  list  of  filenames  to  be moved through the viewing area if it
7205       exceeds the size of the list area.
7206
7207       You can trim the list of file names by using shell globbing characters.
7208       For example, type *.jpg to list only files that end with .jpg.
7209
7210       To  select  your image from the X server screen instead of from a file,
7211       Choose Grab of the Open widget.
7212

VISUAL IMAGE DIRECTORY

7214       To create a Visual Image Directory, choose Visual Directory of the File
7215       sub-menu from the Command widget . A file browser is displayed. To cre‐
7216       ate a Visual Image Directory from all the images in the current  direc‐
7217       tory,  press Directory or press the RETURN key.  Alternatively, you can
7218       select a set of image names by using  shell  globbing  characters.  For
7219       example,  type  *.jpg  to  include  only  files  that end with .jpg. To
7220       descend directories, choose a directory name and press the button twice
7221       quickly.  A  scrollbar  allows  a  large  list of filenames to be moved
7222       through the viewing area if it exceeds the size of the list area.
7223
7224       After you select a set of files, they are turned  into  thumbnails  and
7225       tiled  onto a single image. Now move the pointer to a particular thumb‐
7226       nail and press button 3 and drag. Finally, select Open. The image  rep‐
7227       resented  by  the  thumbnail is displayed at its full size. Choose Next
7228       from the File sub-menu of the Command widget to return  to  the  Visual
7229       Image Directory.
7230

IMAGE CUTTING

7232       Note  that  cut  information  for image window is not retained for col‐
7233       ormapped X server visuals (e.g.  StaticColor,  StaticColor,  GRAYScale,
7234       PseudoColor).   Correct  cutting  behavior  may  require a TrueColor or
7235       DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7236
7237       To begin, press choose Cut of the Edit sub-menu from the  Command  wid‐
7238       get. Alternatively, press F3 in the image window.
7239
7240       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7241       window. You are now in cut mode. In cut mode, the  Command  widget  has
7242       these options:
7243
7244           Help
7245           Dismiss
7246
7247
7248       To  define  a  cut  region,  press button 1 and drag. The cut region is
7249       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7250       lows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cut region, release
7251       the button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the  Command
7252       widget has these options:
7253
7254           Cut
7255           Help
7256           Dismiss
7257
7258
7259       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cut rec‐
7260       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Cut  to
7261       commit  your copy region. To exit without cutting the image, press Dis‐
7262       miss.
7263

IMAGE COPYING

7265       To begin, press choose Copy of the Edit sub-menu from the Command  wid‐
7266       get. Alternatively, press F4 in the image window.
7267
7268       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7269       window. You are now in copy mode. In copy mode, the Command widget  has
7270       these options:
7271
7272           Help
7273           Dismiss
7274
7275
7276       To  define  a  copy region, press button 1 and drag. The copy region is
7277       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7278       lows  the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the copy region, release
7279       the button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the  Command
7280       widget has these options:
7281
7282           Copy
7283           Help
7284           Dismiss
7285
7286
7287       You  can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the copy rec‐
7288       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Copy to
7289       commit  your copy region. To exit without copying the image, press Dis‐
7290       miss.
7291

IMAGE PASTING

7293       To begin, press choose Paste of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7294       get. Alternatively, press F5 in the image window.
7295
7296       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7297       window. You are now in Paste mode. To exit immediately, press  Dismiss.
7298       In Paste mode, the Command widget has these options:
7299
7300           Operators
7301
7302           over
7303           in
7304           out
7305           atop
7306           xor
7307           plus
7308           minus
7309           add
7310           subtract
7311           difference
7312           multiply
7313           bumpmap
7314           replace
7315
7316           Help
7317           Dismiss
7318
7319
7320       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7321       widget. How each operator behaves is described below. image  window  is
7322       the  image  currently displayed on your X server and image is the image
7323       obtained with the File Browser widget.
7324
7325       over    The result is the union of the two  image  shapes,  with  image
7326              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7327
7328       in       The  result  is simply image cut by the shape of image window.
7329              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7330
7331       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7332              out.
7333
7334       atop     The  result  is  the  same  shape  as image window, with image
7335              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7336              differs  from  over  because  the portion of image outside image
7337              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7338
7339       xor     The result is the image data from both image and  image  window
7340              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7341
7342       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7343              cropped to the maximum value (no overflow).  This  operation  is
7344              independent of the matte channels.
7345
7346       minus    The  result of image - image window, with underflow cropped to
7347              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to opaque,  full  cover‐
7348              age).
7349
7350       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7351              around (mod MaxRGB+1).
7352
7353       subtract
7354               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7355              around  (mod  MaxRGB+1).  The  add and subtract operators can be
7356              used to perform reversible transformations.
7357
7358       difference
7359               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7360              comparing two very similar images.
7361
7362       multiply
7363               The result of image * image window. This is useful for the cre‐
7364              ation of drop-shadows.
7365
7366       bumpmap
7367               The result of image window shaded by window.
7368
7369       replace
7370              The resulting image is image window replaced with  image.   Here
7371              the matte information is ignored.
7372
7373              The  image  compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel in the
7374              image for some operations. This extra channel usually defines  a
7375              mask  which  represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image.
7376              This is the case when matte is 255 (full  coverage)  for  pixels
7377              inside  the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on the
7378              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7379              ized  with  0  for any pixel matching in color to pixel location
7380              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7381              a matte channel.
7382
7383              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7384              colormapped X server  visuals  (e.g.  StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7385              GrayScale,   PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior  may
7386              require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual  or  a  Standard  Col‐
7387              ormap.
7388
7389              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7390              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7391              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7392              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7393              identify your location.
7394
7395              The  actual  colors  of  the pasted image is saved. However, the
7396              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7397              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen image window will appear black or
7398              white even though your pasted image may have many colors. If the
7399              image  is saved to a file it is written with the correct colors.
7400              To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,  any
7401              PseudoClass  image is promoted to DirectClass.  To force a Pseu‐
7402              doClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7403

IMAGE CROPPING

7405       To begin, press choose Crop of the Transform submenu from  the  Command
7406       widget. Alternatively, press C in the image window.
7407
7408       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7409       window. You are now in crop mode. In crop mode, the Command widget  has
7410       these options:
7411
7412           Help
7413           Dismiss
7414
7415
7416       To  define  a  cropping  region,  press button 1 and drag. The cropping
7417       region is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or  contracts
7418       as  it  follows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cropping
7419       region, release the button. You are now in  rectify  mode.  In  rectify
7420       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7421
7422           Crop
7423           Help
7424           Dismiss
7425
7426
7427       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cropping
7428       rectangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Crop
7429       to  commit  your  cropping  region. To exit without cropping the image,
7430       press Dismiss.
7431

IMAGE CHOPPING

7433       An image is chopped interactively. There is no command line argument to
7434       chop an image. To begin, choose Chop of the Transform sub-menu from the
7435       Command widget. Alternatively, press [ in the Image window.
7436
7437       You are now in Chop mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.  In  Chop
7438       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7439
7440           Direction
7441
7442           horizontal
7443           vertical
7444
7445           Help
7446           Dismiss
7447
7448
7449       If  the  you choose the horizontal direction (this is the default), the
7450       area of the image between the two horizontal endpoints of the chop line
7451       is  removed.  Otherwise, the area of the image between the two vertical
7452       endpoints of the chop line is removed.
7453
7454       Select a location within the image window to begin your chop, press and
7455       hold  any  button.  Next,  move  the pointer to another location in the
7456       image.  As you move a line will connect the initial  location  and  the
7457       pointer. When you release the button, the area within the image to chop
7458       is determined by which direction you choose from the Command widget.
7459
7460       To cancel the image chopping, move the pointer  back  to  the  starting
7461       point of the line and release the button.
7462

IMAGE ROTATION

7464       Press  the  /  key  to  rotate  the image 90 degrees or \ to rotate -90
7465       degrees.  To  interactively  choose  the  degree  of  rotation,  choose
7466       Rotate...   of the Transform submenu from the Command Widget.  Alterna‐
7467       tively, press * in the image window.
7468
7469       A small horizontal line is drawn next to the pointer. You  are  now  in
7470       rotate  mode.  To  exit immediately, press Dismiss. In rotate mode, the
7471       Command widget has these options:
7472
7473           Pixel Color
7474
7475           black
7476           blue
7477           cyan
7478           green
7479           gray
7480           red
7481           magenta
7482           yellow
7483           white
7484           Browser...
7485
7486           Direction
7487
7488           horizontal
7489           vertical
7490
7491           Help
7492           Dismiss
7493
7494
7495       Choose a background color from the  Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7496       background  colors  can  be  specified  with the color browser. You can
7497       change the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7498
7499       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
7500       background  color  by  moving  the  pointer to the desired color on the
7501       screen and press any button.
7502
7503       Choose a point in the image window and  press  this  button  and  hold.
7504       Next,  move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move a
7505       line connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release
7506       the  button, the degree of image rotation is determined by the slope of
7507       the line you just drew. The slope is  relative  to  the  direction  you
7508       choose from the Direction sub-menu of the Command widget.
7509
7510       To  cancel  the  image  rotation, move the pointer back to the starting
7511       point of the line and release the button.
7512

IMAGE ANNOTATION

7514       An image is annotated interactively. There is no command line  argument
7515       to  annotate an image. To begin, choose Annotate of the Image Edit sub-
7516       menu from the Command widget. Alternatively, press a in the image  win‐
7517       dow.
7518
7519       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7520       window. You are now in annotate mode. To exit immediately,  press  Dis‐
7521       miss.  In annotate mode, the Command widget has these options:
7522
7523
7524       Font Name
7525
7526
7527       fixed
7528
7529       variable
7530
7531       5x8
7532
7533       6x10
7534
7535       7x13bold
7536
7537       8x13bold
7538
7539       9x15bold
7540
7541       10x20
7542
7543       12x24
7544
7545       Browser...
7546
7547
7548       Font Color
7549
7550
7551       black
7552
7553       blue
7554
7555       cyan
7556
7557       green
7558
7559       gray
7560
7561       red
7562
7563       magenta
7564
7565       yellow
7566
7567       white
7568
7569       transparent
7570
7571       Browser...
7572
7573
7574       Box Color
7575
7576
7577       black
7578
7579       blue
7580
7581       cyan
7582
7583       green
7584
7585       gray
7586
7587       red
7588
7589       magenta
7590
7591       yellow
7592
7593       white
7594
7595       transparent
7596
7597       Browser...
7598
7599
7600       Rotate Text
7601
7602
7603       -90
7604
7605       -45
7606
7607       -30
7608
7609       0
7610
7611       30
7612
7613       45
7614
7615       90
7616
7617       180
7618
7619       Dialog...
7620
7621
7622       Help
7623
7624       Dismiss
7625
7626
7627       Choose  a  font name from the Font Name sub-menu. Additional font names
7628       can be specified with the font browser. You can change the  menu  names
7629       by setting the X resources font1 through font9.
7630
7631       Choose  a font color from the Font Color sub-menu. Additional font col‐
7632       ors can be specified with the color browser. You can  change  the  menu
7633       colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7634
7635       If you select the color browser and press Grab, you can choose the font
7636       color by moving the pointer to the desired  color  on  the  screen  and
7637       press any button.
7638
7639       If  you choose to rotate the text, choose Rotate Text from the menu and
7640       select an angle. Typically you will only want to  rotate  one  line  of
7641       text at a time. Depending on the angle you choose, subsequent lines may
7642       end up overwriting each other.
7643
7644       Choosing a font and its color is optional. The default  font  is  fixed
7645       and  the default color is black. However, you must choose a location to
7646       begin entering text and press a button. An  underscore  character  will
7647       appear  at  the location of the pointer. The cursor changes to a pencil
7648       to indicate you are in text mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7649
7650       In text mode, any key presses will display the character at  the  loca‐
7651       tion  of  the  underscore and advance the underscore cursor. Enter your
7652       text and once completed press Apply to finish your image annotation. To
7653       correct  errors  press  BACK  SPACE.  To delete an entire line of text,
7654       press DELETE.  Any text that exceeds the boundaries of the image window
7655       is automatically continued onto the next line.
7656
7657       The  actual  color you request for the font is saved in the image. How‐
7658       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7659       example,  on  a  monochrome  screen the text will appear black or white
7660       even if you choose the color red as the font color. However, the  image
7661       saved  to  a  file with -write is written with red lettering. To assure
7662       the correct color text in the final image,  any  PseudoClass  image  is
7663       promoted  to DirectClass (see miff(5)). To force a PseudoClass image to
7664       remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7665

IMAGE COMPOSITING

7667       An image composite is created interactively. There is no  command  line
7668       argument to composite an image. To begin, choose Composite of the Image
7669       Edit from the Command widget. Alternatively, press x in the Image  win‐
7670       dow.
7671
7672       First  a  popup  window  is  displayed requesting you to enter an image
7673       name.  Press Composite, Grab or type a file name. Press Cancel  if  you
7674       choose  not to create a composite image. When you choose Grab, move the
7675       pointer to the desired window and press any button.
7676
7677       If the Composite image does not have any  matte  information,  you  are
7678       informed  and  the file browser is displayed again. Enter the name of a
7679       mask image. The image is typically grayscale and the same size  as  the
7680       composite  image.  If  the  image  is not grayscale, it is converted to
7681       grayscale and the resulting intensities are used as matte information.
7682
7683       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7684       window.  You are now in composite mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7685       miss.  In composite mode, the Command widget has these options:
7686
7687
7688       Operators
7689
7690
7691       over
7692
7693       in
7694
7695       out
7696
7697       atop
7698
7699       xor
7700
7701       plus
7702
7703       minus
7704
7705       add
7706
7707       subtract
7708
7709       difference
7710
7711       bumpmap
7712
7713       replace
7714
7715
7716       Blend
7717
7718       Displace
7719
7720       Help
7721
7722       Dismiss
7723
7724
7725       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7726       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7727       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7728       obtained
7729
7730       over     The  result  is  the union of the two image shapes, with image
7731              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7732
7733       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7734              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7735
7736       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7737              out.
7738
7739       atop    The result is the  same  shape  as  image  window,  with  image
7740              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7741              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7742              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7743
7744       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7745              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7746
7747       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7748              cropped  to  255 (no overflow). This operation is independent of
7749              the matte channels.
7750
7751       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7752              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to 255, full coverage).
7753
7754       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7755              around (mod 256).
7756
7757       subtract
7758               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7759              around  (mod 256). The add and subtract operators can be used to
7760              perform reversible transformations.
7761
7762       difference
7763               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7764              comparing two very similar images.
7765
7766       bumpmap
7767               The result of image window shaded by window.
7768
7769       replace
7770                The resulting image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7771              the matte information is ignored.
7772
7773              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7774              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7775              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7776              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7777              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7778              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7779              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7780              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7781              a matte channel.
7782
7783              If you choose blend, the composite operator becomes  over.   The
7784              image  matte channel percent transparency is initialized to fac‐
7785              tor.  The image window is  initialized  to  (100-factor).  Where
7786              factor is the value you specify in the Dialog widget.
7787
7788              Displace  shifts  the  image pixels as defined by a displacement
7789              map.  With this option, image is used  as  a  displacement  map.
7790              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
7791              placement. White is a maximum negative displacement  and  middle
7792              gray  is  neutral.  The  displacement is scaled to determine the
7793              pixel shift. By default, the displacement applies  in  both  the
7794              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.  However,  if you specify
7795              mask, image is the horizontal X displacement and mask the verti‐
7796              cal Y displacement.
7797
7798              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7799              colormapped X server visuals  (e.g.   StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7800              GrayScale,   PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior  may
7801              require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual  or  a  Standard  Col‐
7802              ormap.
7803
7804              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7805              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7806              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7807              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7808              identify your location.
7809
7810              The  actual colors of the composite image is saved. However, the
7811              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7812              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen Image window will appear black or
7813              white even though your composited image may have many colors. If
7814              the image is saved to a file it is written with the correct col‐
7815              ors. To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,
7816              any PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass (see miff).  To
7817              force a PseudoClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7818

COLOR EDITING

7820       Changing the the color of a set of pixels is  performed  interactively.
7821       There  is  no  command  line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, choose
7822       Color from the Image Edit submenu  of  the  Command  widget.   Alterna‐
7823       tively, press c in the image window.
7824
7825       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7826       window. You are now in color edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7827       miss.  In color edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7828
7829
7830       Method
7831
7832
7833       point
7834
7835       replace
7836
7837       floodfill
7838
7839       reset
7840
7841
7842       Pixel Color
7843
7844
7845       black
7846
7847       blue
7848
7849       cyan
7850
7851       green
7852
7853       gray
7854
7855       red
7856
7857       magenta
7858
7859       yellow
7860
7861       white
7862
7863       Browser...
7864
7865
7866       Border Color
7867
7868
7869       black
7870
7871       blue
7872
7873       cyan
7874
7875       green
7876
7877       gray
7878
7879       red
7880
7881       magenta
7882
7883       yellow
7884
7885       white
7886
7887       Browser...
7888
7889
7890       Fuzz
7891
7892
7893       0
7894
7895       2
7896
7897       4
7898
7899       8
7900
7901       16
7902           Dialog...
7903
7904
7905       Undo
7906
7907       Help
7908
7909       Dismiss
7910
7911
7912       Choose  a  color editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
7913       widget. The point method recolors any pixel selected with  the  pointer
7914       unless  the  button  is released. The replace method recolors any pixel
7915       that matches the color of the pixel you select  with  a  button  press.
7916       Floodfill  recolors  any  pixel that matches the color of the pixel you
7917       select with a button press and is  a  neighbor.   Whereas  filltoborder
7918       changes  the  matte  value of any neighbor pixel that is not the border
7919       color.  Finally reset changes the entire image to the designated color.
7920
7921       Next, choose a pixel color from the Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7922       pixel  colors  can  be specified with the color browser. You can change
7923       the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7924
7925       Now press button 1 to select a pixel within the Image window to  change
7926       its  color.  Additional  pixels  may  be recolored as prescribed by the
7927       method you choose. additional pixels by increasing the Delta value.
7928
7929       If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning  your
7930       pointer  within  the  image  (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
7931       select a pixel to recolor from within  the  Magnify  widget.  Move  the
7932       pointer  to  the  Magnify widget and position the pixel with the cursor
7933       control keys. Finally, press a button to recolor the selected pixel (or
7934       pixels).
7935
7936       The actual color you request for the pixels is saved in the image. How‐
7937       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7938       example,  on  a  monochrome screen the pixel will appear black or white
7939       even if you choose the color red as the pixel color. However, the image
7940       saved  to  a file with -write is written with red pixels. To assure the
7941       correct color text in the final image, any PseudoClass  image  is  pro‐
7942       moted  to  DirectClass  To  force a PseudoClass image to remain Pseudo‐
7943       Class, use -colors.
7944

MATTE EDITING

7946       Matte information within an image is useful for some operations such as
7947       image compositing. This extra channel usually defines a mask which rep‐
7948       resents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image. This is the case  when
7949       matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels inside the shape, zero outside,
7950       and between zero and 255 on the boundary.
7951
7952       Setting the matte information in an image is done interactively.  There
7953       is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, and choose Matte
7954       of the Image Edit sub-menu from the Command widget.
7955
7956       Alternatively, press m in the image window.
7957
7958       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7959       window. You are now in matte edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7960       miss.  In matte edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7961
7962
7963       Method
7964
7965
7966       point
7967
7968       replace
7969
7970       floodfill
7971
7972       reset
7973
7974
7975       Border Color
7976
7977
7978       black
7979
7980       blue
7981
7982       cyan
7983
7984       green
7985
7986       gray
7987
7988       red
7989
7990       magenta
7991
7992       yellow
7993
7994       white
7995
7996       Browser...
7997
7998
7999       Fuzz
8000
8001
8002       0
8003
8004       2
8005
8006       4
8007
8008       8
8009
8010       16
8011           Dialog...
8012
8013
8014       Matte
8015
8016       Undo
8017
8018       Help
8019
8020       Dismiss
8021
8022       Choose a matte editing method from the Method sub-menu of  the  Command
8023       widget.  The  point  method  changes  the  matte value of the any pixel
8024       selected with the pointer until the button  is  released.  The  replace
8025       method  changes  the matte value of any pixel that matches the color of
8026       the pixel you select with a button press. Floodfill changes  the  matte
8027       value  of any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you select with
8028       a button press and is a neighbor.  Whereas  filltoborder  recolors  any
8029       neighbor  pixel that is not the border color. Finally reset changes the
8030       entire image to the designated matte value.  Choose Matte Value  and  a
8031       dialog  appears  requesting a matte value.  Enter a value between 0 and
8032       255. This value is assigned as the matte value of the selected pixel or
8033       pixels.   Now, press any button to select a pixel within the Image win‐
8034       dow to change its matte value. You can change the matte value of  addi‐
8035       tional  pixels  by increasing the Delta value. The Delta value is first
8036       added then subtracted from the red,  green,  and  blue  of  the  target
8037       color. Any pixels within the range also have their matte value updated.
8038       If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning  your
8039       pointer  within  the  image  (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
8040       select a pixel to change the matte value from within the  Magnify  wid‐
8041       get.   Move  the  pointer  to the Magnify widget and position the pixel
8042       with the cursor control keys. Finally, press a  button  to  change  the
8043       matte  value  of  the selected pixel (or pixels).  Matte information is
8044       only valid in a DirectClass image. Therefore, any PseudoClass image  is
8045       promoted to DirectClass. Note that matte information for PseudoClass is
8046       not retained for colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor,  Stat‐
8047       icColor, GrayScale, PseudoColor) unless you immediately save your image
8048       to a file (refer to Write). Correct matte editing behavior may  require
8049       a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
8050

IMAGE DRAWING

8052       An image is drawn upon interactively. There is no command line argument
8053       to draw on an image. To begin, choose Draw of the Image  Edit  sub-menu
8054       from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press d in the image window.
8055
8056       The  cursor changes to a crosshair to indicate you are in draw mode. To
8057       exit immediately, press Dismiss. In draw mode, the Command  widget  has
8058       these options:
8059
8060
8061       Primitive
8062
8063
8064       point
8065
8066       line
8067
8068       rectangle
8069
8070       fill rectangle
8071
8072       circle
8073
8074       fill circle
8075
8076       ellipse
8077
8078       fill ellipse
8079
8080       polygon
8081
8082       fill polygon
8083
8084
8085       Color
8086
8087
8088       black
8089
8090       blue
8091
8092       cyan
8093
8094       green
8095
8096       gray
8097
8098       red
8099
8100       magenta
8101
8102       yellow
8103
8104       white
8105
8106       transparent
8107
8108       Browser...
8109
8110
8111       Stipple
8112
8113
8114       Brick
8115
8116       Diagonal
8117
8118       Scales
8119
8120       Vertical
8121
8122       Wavy
8123
8124       Translucent
8125
8126       Opaque
8127
8128       Open...
8129
8130
8131       Width
8132
8133
8134       1
8135
8136       2
8137
8138       4
8139
8140       8
8141
8142       16
8143           Dialog...
8144
8145
8146       Undo
8147
8148       Help
8149
8150       Dismiss
8151
8152       Choose a drawing primitive from the Primitive sub-menu.
8153
8154       Next,  choose a color from the Color sub-menu. Additional colors can be
8155       specified with the color browser. You can change  the  menu  colors  by
8156       setting  the  X  resources  pen1  through  pen9.  The transparent color
8157       updates the image matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8158
8159       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
8160       primitive  color  by  moving  the  pointer  to the desired color on the
8161       screen and press any button. The transparent color  updates  the  image
8162       matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8163
8164       Choose a stipple, if appropriate, from the Stipple sub-menu. Additional
8165       stipples can be specified with the file browser. Stipples obtained from
8166       the file browser must be on disk in the X11 bitmap format.
8167
8168       Choose a line width, if appropriate, from the Width sub-menu. To choose
8169       a specific width select the Dialog widget.
8170
8171       Choose a point in the image window and press button 1 and  hold.  Next,
8172       move  the pointer to another location in the image. As you move, a line
8173       connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release  the
8174       button,  the  image  is  updated  with the primitive you just drew. For
8175       polygons, the image is updated when you press and  release  the  button
8176       without moving the pointer.
8177
8178       To cancel image drawing, move the pointer back to the starting point of
8179       the line and release the button.
8180

REGION OF INTEREST

8182       To begin, press choose Region of Interest of the Pixel  Transform  sub-
8183       menu from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press R in the image win‐
8184       dow.
8185
8186       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
8187       window.  You  are now in region of interest mode. In region of interest
8188       mode, the Command widget has these options:
8189
8190
8191       Help
8192
8193       Dismiss
8194
8195
8196       To define a region of interest, press button 1 and drag. The region  of
8197       interest  is  defined  by  a highlighted rectangle that expands or con‐
8198       tracts as it follows the pointer.  Once  you  are  satisfied  with  the
8199       region  of  interest, release the button. You are now in apply mode. In
8200       apply mode the Command widget has these options:
8201
8202
8203       File
8204
8205
8206       Save...
8207
8208       Print...
8209
8210
8211       Edit
8212
8213
8214       Undo
8215
8216       Redo
8217
8218
8219       Transform
8220
8221
8222       Flip
8223
8224       Flop
8225
8226       Rotate Right
8227
8228       Rotate Left
8229
8230
8231       Enhance
8232
8233
8234       Hue...
8235
8236       Saturation...
8237
8238       Brightness...
8239
8240       Gamma...
8241
8242       Spiff
8243
8244       Dull
8245
8246       Equalize
8247
8248       Normalize
8249
8250       Negate
8251
8252       GRAYscale
8253
8254       Quantize...
8255
8256
8257       Effects
8258
8259
8260       Despeckle
8261
8262       Emboss
8263
8264       Reduce Noise
8265
8266       Add Noise
8267
8268       Sharpen...
8269
8270       Blur...
8271
8272       Threshold...
8273
8274       Edge Detect...
8275
8276       Spread...
8277
8278       Shade...
8279
8280       Raise...
8281
8282       Segment...
8283
8284
8285
8286
8287       F/X
8288
8289
8290       Solarize...
8291
8292       Swirl...
8293
8294       Implode...
8295
8296       Wave...
8297
8298       Oil Paint
8299
8300       Charcoal Draw...
8301
8302
8303
8304
8305       Miscellany
8306
8307
8308       Image Info
8309
8310       Zoom Image
8311
8312       Show Preview...
8313
8314       Show Histogram
8315
8316       Show Matte
8317
8318
8319       Help
8320
8321       Dismiss
8322
8323
8324       You can make adjustments to  the  region  of  interest  by  moving  the
8325       pointer  to  one of the rectangle corners, pressing a button, and drag‐
8326       ging. Finally, choose an image processing technique  from  the  Command
8327       widget.  You  can  choose  more  than one image processing technique to
8328       apply to an area. Alternatively, you can move the  region  of  interest
8329       before applying another image processing technique. To exit, press Dis‐
8330       miss.
8331

IMAGE PANNING

8333       When an image exceeds the width or height of the X server screen,  dis‐
8334       play  maps  a small panning icon. The rectangle within the panning icon
8335       shows the area that is currently displayed in the the image window.  To
8336       pan  about  the image, press any button and drag the pointer within the
8337       panning icon.  The pan rectangle moves with the pointer and  the  image
8338       window  is  updated to reflect the location of the rectangle within the
8339       panning icon. When you have selected the area of the image you wish  to
8340       view, release the button.
8341
8342       Use  the arrow keys to pan the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
8343       within the image window.
8344
8345       The panning icon is withdrawn if the image  becomes  smaller  than  the
8346       dimensions of the X server screen.
8347

USER PREFERENCES

8349       Preferences  affect the default behavior of display(1). The preferences
8350       are either true or false and are stored in your home directory as .dis‐
8351       playrc:
8352
8353                display image centered on a backdrop"
8354
8355
8356                    This  backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is
8357                    useful for hiding other X window  activity  while  viewing
8358                    the  image.  The color of the backdrop is specified as the
8359                    background color. Refer to X Resources for details.
8360                confirm on program exit"
8361
8362
8363                    Ask for a confirmation before exiting the display(1)  pro‐
8364                    gram.
8365                correct image for display gamma"
8366
8367
8368                    If  the image has a known gamma, the gamma is corrected to
8369                    match that of the  X  server  (see  the  X  Resource  dis‐
8370                    playGamma).
8371                display warning messages"
8372
8373
8374                    Display any warning messages.
8375                apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to image"
8376
8377
8378                    The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity res‐
8379                    olution for spatial resolution by averaging  the  intensi‐
8380                    ties  of  several neighboring pixels.  Images which suffer
8381                    from  severe  contouring  when  reducing  colors  can   be
8382                    improved with this preference.
8383                use a shared colormap for colormapped X visuals"
8384
8385
8386                    This  option only applies when the default X server visual
8387                    is PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer  to  -visual  for  more
8388                    details.  By  default, a shared colormap is allocated. The
8389                    image shares colors with other X clients.  Some image col‐
8390                    ors  could  be approximated, therefore your image may look
8391                    very different than intended. Otherwise the  image  colors
8392                    appear exactly as they are defined. However, other clients
8393                    may go technicolor when the image colormap is installed.
8394                display images as an X server pixmap"
8395
8396
8397                    Images are maintained as a XImage  by  default.  Set  this
8398                    resource  to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This
8399                    option is useful if your image exceeds the  dimensions  of
8400                    your  server  screen and you intend to pan the image. Pan‐
8401                    ning is much faster  with  Pixmaps  than  with  a  XImage.
8402                    Pixmaps  are considered a precious resource, use them with
8403                    discretion.
8404
8405
8406
8407       GM IDENTIFY
8408
8409              Identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more
8410              image  files  as  internally  supported by the software. It will
8411              also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.  The  informa‐
8412              tion  displayed  includes  the  scene number, the file name, the
8413              width and height of the image, whether the image is  colormapped
8414              or  not,  the number of colors in the image, the number of bytes
8415              in the image, the format of the image  (JPEG,  PNM,  etc.),  and
8416              finally the number of seconds in both user time and elapsed time
8417              it took to read and process the image.  If -verbose or +ping are
8418              provided as an option, the pixel read rate is also displayed. An
8419              example line output from identify follows:
8420
8421                  images/aquarium.miff 640x480 PseudoClass 256c
8422                         308135b MIFF 0.000u 0:01
8423
8424
8425              If -verbose is set, expect additional output including any image
8426              comment:
8427
8428
8429                  Image: images/aquarium.miff
8430                  class: PseudoClass
8431                  colors: 256
8432                  signature: eb5dca81dd93ae7e6ffae99a527eb5dca8...
8433                  matte: False
8434                  geometry: 640x480
8435                     depth: 8
8436                  bytes: 308135
8437                  format: MIFF
8438                  comments:
8439                  Imported from MTV raster image: aquarium.mtv
8440
8441
8442              For  some  formats, additional format-specific information about
8443              the file will be written if  the  -debug  coder  or  -debug  all
8444              option is used.
8445

IDENTIFY OPTIONS

8447       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8448       the command line remains in effect for the set  of  images  immediately
8449       following,  until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option
8450       or -noop.
8451
8452       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8453
8454
8455       -authenticate <string>
8456              decrypt image with this password
8457
8458       -debug <events>
8459              enable debug printout
8460
8461       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8462              add coder/decoder specific options
8463
8464       -density <width>x<height>
8465              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8466
8467       -depth <value>
8468              depth of the image
8469
8470       -format <string>
8471              output formatted image characteristics
8472
8473       -help  print usage instructions
8474
8475       -interlace <type>
8476              the type of interlacing scheme
8477
8478       -limit <type> <value>
8479              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
8480              resource limit
8481
8482       -log <string>
8483              Specify format for debug log
8484
8485       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8486
8487       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8488              chroma subsampling factors
8489
8490       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
8491              width and height of the image
8492
8493       -verbose
8494              print detailed information about the image
8495
8496       -version
8497              print GraphicsMagick version string
8498
8499              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
8500              above.
8501
8502

GM IMPORT

8504       Import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
8505       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
8506       screen, or any rectangular portion of  the  screen.   Use  display  for
8507       redisplay,  printing, editing, formatting, archiving, image processing,
8508       etc. of the captured image.
8509
8510       The target window can be specified by id, name, or may be  selected  by
8511       clicking  the  mouse  in  the desired window. If you press a button and
8512       then drag, a rectangle will form which expands  and  contracts  as  the
8513       mouse  moves.  To save the portion of the screen defined by the rectan‐
8514       gle, just release the button. The keyboard bell is  rung  once  at  the
8515       beginning of the screen capture and twice when it completes.
8516

EXAMPLES

8518       To  select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8519       it in the MIFF image format to a file entitled window.miff, use:
8520
8521           gm import window.miff
8522
8523
8524       To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and  save
8525       it  in  the  Encapsulated PostScript format to include in another docu‐
8526       ment, use:
8527
8528           gm import figure.eps
8529
8530
8531       To capture the entire X server screen in the JPEG  image  format  in  a
8532       file entitled root.jpeg, without using the mouse, use:
8533
8534           gm import -window root root.jpeg
8535
8536
8537       To  capture  the 512x256 area at the upper right corner of the X server
8538       screen in the PNG image format in a well-compressed file entitled  cor‐
8539       ner.png, without using the mouse,  use:
8540
8541           gm import -window root -crop 512x256-0+0 -quality 90
8542                  corner.png
8543
8544

OPTIONS

8546       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8547       the command line remains in effect until it is  explicitly  changed  by
8548       specifying the option again with a different effect.
8549
8550       Import  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resources
8551       file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values  specified
8552       in your X resources file.
8553
8554       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8555
8556
8557       -bordercolor <color>
8558              the border color
8559
8560       -colors <value>
8561              preferred number of colors in the image
8562
8563       -colorspace <value>
8564              the type of colorspace
8565
8566       -comment <string>
8567              annotate an image with a comment
8568
8569       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8570              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8571
8572       -debug <events>
8573              enable debug printout
8574
8575       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8576              add coder/decoder specific options
8577
8578       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8579              display the next image after pausing
8580
8581       -density <width>x<height>
8582              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8583
8584       -depth <value>
8585              depth of the image
8586
8587       -descend
8588              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
8589
8590       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8591              specifies the X server to contact
8592
8593       -dispose <method>
8594              GIF disposal method
8595
8596       -dither
8597              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8598
8599       -encoding <type>
8600              specify the text encoding
8601
8602       -endian <type>
8603              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8604
8605       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
8606
8607       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8608              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8609
8610       -help  print usage instructions
8611
8612       -interlace <type>
8613              the type of interlacing scheme
8614
8615       -label <name>
8616              assign a label to an image
8617
8618       -limit <type> <value>
8619              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
8620              resource limit
8621
8622       -log <string>
8623              Specify format for debug log
8624
8625       -monitor
8626              show progress indication
8627
8628       -monochrome
8629              transform the image to black and white
8630
8631       -negate
8632              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8633
8634       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8635              size and location of an image canvas
8636
8637       -pause <seconds>
8638              pause between snapshots [import]
8639
8640       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8641
8642       -pointsize <value>
8643              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8644
8645       -quality <value>
8646              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8647
8648       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8649              resize an image
8650
8651       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8652              rotate the image
8653
8654       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8655              chroma subsampling factors
8656
8657       -scene <value>
8658              set scene number
8659
8660       -screen
8661              specify the screen to capture
8662
8663       -set <attribute> <value>
8664              set an image attribute
8665
8666       +set <attribute>
8667              unset an image attribute
8668
8669       -silent
8670              operate silently
8671
8672       -snaps <value>
8673              number of screen snapshots
8674
8675       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8676              resize an image (quickly)
8677
8678       -transparent <color>
8679              make this color transparent within the image
8680
8681       -trim  trim an image
8682
8683       -verbose
8684              print detailed information about the image
8685
8686       -version
8687              print GraphicsMagick version string
8688
8689              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
8690              above.
8691
8692

GM MOGRIFY

8694       Mogrify  transforms  an image or a sequence of images. These transforms
8695       include image scaling, image rotation,  color  reduction,  and  others.
8696       Each  transmogrified image overwrites the corresponding original image,
8697       unless an option such as -format causes the output filename to be  dif‐
8698       ferent from the input filename.
8699
8700       The  graphics  formats  supported by mogrify are listed in GraphicsMag‐
8701       ick(1).
8702

EXAMPLES

8704       To convert all the TIFF files in a particular directory to JPEG, use:
8705
8706           gm mogrify -format jpeg *.tiff
8707
8708
8709       To convert a directory full of JPEG images to thumbnails, use:
8710
8711           gm mogrify -size 120x120 *.jpg -resize 120x120 +profile "*"
8712
8713
8714       In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder  that
8715       the  images  are  going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
8716       faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images  to  GraphicsMagick
8717       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
8718       the desired dimensions of the output images.  It will be scaled so  its
8719       largest  dimension  is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
8720       EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in  the  input  and
8721       aren't needed in the thumbnails.
8722
8723       To  scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
8724       pixels in height, use:
8725
8726           gm mogrify -resize 640x480! cockatoo.miff
8727
8728

OPTIONS

8730       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8731       the  command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
8732       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
8733
8734       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8735
8736
8737       -affine <matrix>
8738              drawing transform matrix
8739
8740       -antialias
8741              remove pixel aliasing
8742
8743        -asc-cdl <spec>
8744              apply ASC CDL color transform
8745
8746       -authenticate <string>
8747              decrypt image with this password
8748
8749       -auto-orient
8750              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
8751
8752       -background <color>
8753              the background color
8754
8755       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
8756              pixels below the threshold become black
8757
8758       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
8759              blue chromaticity primary point
8760
8761       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
8762              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8763
8764       -border <width>x<height>
8765              surround the image with a border of color
8766
8767       -bordercolor <color>
8768              the border color
8769
8770       -channel <type>
8771              the type of channel
8772
8773       -charcoal <factor>
8774              simulate a charcoal drawing
8775
8776       -colorize <value>
8777              colorize the image with the pen color
8778
8779       -colors <value>
8780              preferred number of colors in the image
8781
8782       -colorspace <value>
8783              the type of colorspace
8784
8785       -comment <string>
8786              annotate an image with a comment
8787
8788       -compose <operator>
8789              the type of image composition
8790
8791       -compress <type>
8792              the type of image compression
8793
8794       -contrast
8795              enhance or reduce the image contrast
8796
8797       -convolve <kernel>
8798              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
8799
8800       -create-directories
8801              create output directory if required
8802
8803       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8804              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8805
8806       -cycle <amount>
8807              displace image colormap by amount
8808
8809       -debug <events>
8810              enable debug printout
8811
8812       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8813              add coder/decoder specific options
8814
8815       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8816              display the next image after pausing
8817
8818       -density <width>x<height>
8819              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8820
8821       -depth <value>
8822              depth of the image
8823
8824       -despeckle
8825              reduce the speckles within an image
8826
8827       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8828              specifies the X server to contact
8829
8830       -dispose <method>
8831              GIF disposal method
8832
8833       -dither
8834              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8835
8836       -draw <string>
8837              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
8838
8839       -edge <radius>
8840              detect edges within an image
8841
8842       -emboss <radius>
8843              emboss an image
8844
8845       -encoding <type>
8846              specify the text encoding
8847
8848       -endian <type>
8849              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8850
8851       -enhance
8852              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
8853
8854       -equalize
8855              perform histogram equalization to the image
8856
8857       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8858              composite image on background color canvas image
8859
8860       -fill <color>
8861              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
8862
8863       -filter <type>
8864              use this type of filter when resizing an image
8865
8866       -flip  create a "mirror image"
8867
8868       -flop  create a "mirror image"
8869
8870       -font <name>
8871              use this font when annotating the image with text
8872
8873       -format <type>
8874              the image format type
8875
8876       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
8877              surround the image with an ornamental border
8878
8879       -fuzz <distance>{%}
8880              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
8881
8882       -gamma <value>
8883              level of gamma correction
8884
8885       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
8886              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8887
8888       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8889              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8890
8891       -gravity <type>
8892              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
8893
8894       -green-primary <x>,<y>
8895              green chromaticity primary point
8896
8897       -hald-clut <clut>
8898              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
8899
8900       -help  print usage instructions
8901
8902       -implode <factor>
8903              implode image pixels about the center
8904
8905       -interlace <type>
8906              the type of interlacing scheme
8907
8908       -label <name>
8909              assign a label to an image
8910
8911       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
8912              perform local adaptive thresholding
8913
8914       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
8915              adjust the level of image contrast
8916
8917       -limit <type> <value>
8918              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
8919              resource limit
8920
8921       -linewidth
8922              the line width for subsequent draw operations
8923
8924       -list <type>
8925              the type of list
8926
8927       -log <string>
8928              Specify format for debug log
8929
8930       -loop <iterations>
8931              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
8932
8933       -magnify
8934              magnify the image
8935
8936       -map <filename>
8937              choose a particular set of colors from this image
8938
8939       -mask <filename>
8940              Specify a clipping mask
8941
8942       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
8943
8944       -mattecolor <color>
8945              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
8946
8947       -median <radius>
8948              apply a median filter to the image
8949
8950       -minify <factor>
8951              minify the image
8952
8953       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
8954              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
8955
8956       -monitor
8957              show progress indication
8958
8959       -monochrome
8960              transform the image to black and white
8961
8962       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
8963              Simulate motion blur
8964
8965       -negate
8966              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8967
8968       -noise <radius|type>
8969              add or reduce noise in an image
8970
8971       -noop  NOOP (no option)
8972
8973       -normalize
8974              transform image to span the full range of color values
8975
8976       -opaque <color>
8977              change this color to the pen color within the image
8978
8979       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
8980              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
8981              channel
8982
8983       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
8984              ordered dither the image
8985
8986       -output-directory <directory>
8987              output files to directory
8988
8989       -orient <orientation>
8990              Set the image orientation attribute
8991
8992       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8993              size and location of an image canvas
8994
8995       -paint <radius>
8996              simulate an oil painting
8997
8998       -pen <color>
8999              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9000
9001       -pointsize <value>
9002              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9003
9004       -profile <filename>
9005              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
9006
9007       -preserve-timestamp
9008              preserve the original timestamps of the file
9009
9010       -quality <value>
9011              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9012
9013       -raise <width>x<height>
9014              lighten or darken image edges
9015
9016       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
9017              random threshold the image
9018
9019       -recolor <matrix>
9020              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
9021
9022       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9023              red chromaticity primary point
9024
9025       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9026              apply options to a portion of the image
9027
9028       -render
9029              render vector operations
9030
9031       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9032              Adjust image page offsets
9033
9034       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
9035              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
9036
9037       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9038              resize an image
9039
9040       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9041              roll an image vertically or horizontally
9042
9043       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9044              rotate the image
9045
9046       -sample <geometry>
9047              scale image using pixel sampling
9048
9049       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9050              chroma subsampling factors
9051
9052       -scale <geometry>
9053              scale the image.
9054
9055       -scene <value>
9056              set scene number
9057
9058       -set <attribute> <value>
9059              set an image attribute
9060
9061       +set <attribute>
9062              unset an image attribute
9063
9064       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
9065              segment an image
9066
9067       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
9068              shade the image using a distant light source
9069
9070       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9071              sharpen the image
9072
9073       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
9074              shave pixels from the image edges
9075
9076       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
9077              shear the image along the X or Y axis
9078
9079       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9080              width and height of the image
9081
9082       -solarize <factor>
9083              negate all pixels above the threshold level
9084
9085       -spread <amount>
9086              displace image pixels by a random amount
9087
9088       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9089
9090       -stroke <color>
9091              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9092
9093       -strokewidth <value>
9094              set the stroke width
9095
9096       -swirl <degrees>
9097              swirl image pixels about the center
9098
9099       -texture <filename>
9100              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9101
9102       -threshold <value>{%}
9103              threshold the image
9104
9105       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9106              resize an image (quickly)
9107
9108       -tile <filename>
9109              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
9110
9111       -transform
9112              transform the image
9113
9114       -transparent <color>
9115              make this color transparent within the image
9116
9117       -treedepth <value>
9118              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9119
9120       -trim  trim an image
9121
9122       -type <type>
9123              the image type
9124
9125       -units <type>
9126              the units of image resolution
9127
9128       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
9129              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
9130
9131       -verbose
9132              print detailed information about the image
9133
9134       -version
9135              print GraphicsMagick version string
9136
9137       -view <string>
9138              FlashPix viewing parameters
9139
9140       -virtual-pixel <method>
9141              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
9142
9143       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
9144              alter an image along a sine wave
9145
9146       -white-point <x>,<y>
9147              chromaticity white point
9148
9149       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
9150              pixels above the threshold become white
9151
9152              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
9153              above.
9154
9155

GM MONTAGE

9157       montage creates a composite image by combining several separate images.
9158       The images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the  image
9159       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
9160
9161       The composite image is constructed in the following manner. First, each
9162       image specified on the command line, except for the last, is scaled  to
9163       fit the maximum tile size. The maximum tile size by default is 120x120.
9164       It can be modified with  the  -geometry  command  line  argument  or  X
9165       resource.  See  Options for more information on command line arguments.
9166       See X(1) for more information on X resources.  Note  that  the  maximum
9167       tile size need not be a square.
9168
9169       Next the composite image is initialized with the color specified by the
9170       -background command line argument or X resource. The width  and  height
9171       of  the composite image is determined by the title specified, the maxi‐
9172       mum tile size, the number of tiles per row, the tile border  width  and
9173       height,  the  image  border  width, and the label height. The number of
9174       tiles per row specifies how many images are to appear in  each  row  of
9175       the  composite  image. The default is to have 5 tiles in each row and 4
9176       tiles in each column of the composite.  A specific value  is  specified
9177       with  -tile.  The  tile  border  width and height, and the image border
9178       width defaults to the value of the X resource -borderwidth. It  can  be
9179       changed  with  the -borderwidth or -geometry command line argument or X
9180       resource. The label height is determined by the font you  specify  with
9181       the  -font command line argument or X resource. If you do not specify a
9182       font, a font is chosen that allows the name of the  image  to  fit  the
9183       maximum  width  of a tiled area.  The label colors is determined by the
9184       -background and -fill command line argument or X resource.  Note,  that
9185       if the background and pen colors are the same, labels will not appear.
9186
9187       Initially,  the  composite  image  title is placed at the top if one is
9188       specified (refer to -fill). Next, each image is set onto the  composite
9189       image,  surrounded  by  its  border  color, with its name centered just
9190       below it. The individual images are left-justified within the width  of
9191       the  tiled area.  The order of the images is the same as they appear on
9192       the command line unless the images have a scene  keyword.  If  a  scene
9193       number  is  specified in each image, then the images are tiled onto the
9194       composite in the order of their scene number. Finally, the  last  argu‐
9195       ment  on  the command line is the name assigned to the composite image.
9196       By default, the image is written in the MIFF format and can  be  viewed
9197       or printed with display(1).
9198
9199
9200       Note,  that  if the number of tiles exceeds the default number of 20 (5
9201       per row, 4 per column), more than one composite image  is  created.  To
9202       ensure  a single image is produced, use -tile to increase the number of
9203       tiles to meet or exceed the number of input images.
9204
9205       Finally, to create one or more empty spaces in the sequence  of  tiles,
9206       use the "NULL:" image format.
9207
9208       Note,  a  composite  MIFF  image  displayed to an X server with display
9209       behaves differently than other images. You can think of  the  composite
9210       as  a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of the composite
9211       and press a button to display it. See display(1) and miff(5)
9212

EXAMPLES

9214       To create a montage of a cockatoo, a  parrot,  and  a  hummingbird  and
9215       write it to a file called birds, use:
9216
9217           gm montage cockatoo.miff parrot.miff hummingbird.miff
9218                   birds.miff
9219
9220
9221       To  tile  several  bird  images  so that they are at most 256 pixels in
9222       width and 192 pixels in height, surrounded by a red border,  and  sepa‐
9223       rated by 10 pixels of background color, use:
9224
9225           gm montage -geometry 256x192+10+10 -bordercolor red
9226                   birds.* montage.miff
9227
9228
9229       To  create an unlabeled parrot image, 640 by 480 pixels, and surrounded
9230       by a border of black, use:
9231
9232           gm montage -geometry 640x480 -bordercolor black
9233                   -label "" parrot.miff bird.miff
9234
9235
9236       To create an image of an eagle with a textured background, use:
9237
9238           gm montage -texture bumps.jpg eagle.jpg eagle.png
9239
9240
9241       To join several GIF images together  without  any  extraneous  graphics
9242       (e.g.  no label, no shadowing, no surrounding tile frame), use:
9243
9244           gm montage +frame +shadow +label -tile 5x1
9245                   -geometry 50x50+0+0 *.png joined.png
9246
9247

OPTIONS

9249       Any  option  you  specify on the command line remains in effect for the
9250       group of images following it, until the  group  is  terminated  by  the
9251       appearance  of  any option or -noop.  For example, to make a montage of
9252       three images, the first with 32 colors, the second  with  an  unlimited
9253       number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
9254
9255
9256           gm montage -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
9257                    -colors 16 cockatoo.3 cockatoos.miff
9258
9259
9260       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
9261
9262
9263       -adjoin
9264              join images into a single multi-image file
9265
9266       -affine <matrix>
9267              drawing transform matrix
9268
9269       -authenticate <string>
9270              decrypt image with this password
9271
9272       -background <color>
9273              the background color
9274
9275       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
9276              blue chromaticity primary point
9277
9278       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
9279              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
9280
9281       -bordercolor <color>
9282              the border color
9283
9284       -borderwidth <geometry>
9285              the border width
9286
9287       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9288              remove pixels from the interior of an image
9289
9290       -colors <value>
9291              preferred number of colors in the image
9292
9293       -colorspace <value>
9294              the type of colorspace
9295
9296       -comment <string>
9297              annotate an image with a comment
9298
9299       -compose <operator>
9300              the type of image composition
9301
9302       -compress <type>
9303              the type of image compression
9304
9305       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9306              preferred size and location of the cropped image
9307
9308       -debug <events>
9309              enable debug printout
9310
9311       -define <key>{=<value>},...
9312              add coder/decoder specific options
9313
9314       -density <width>x<height>
9315              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
9316
9317       -depth <value>
9318              depth of the image
9319
9320       -display <host:display[.screen]>
9321              specifies the X server to contact
9322
9323       -dispose <method>
9324              GIF disposal method
9325
9326       -dither
9327              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
9328
9329       -draw <string>
9330              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
9331
9332       -encoding <type>
9333              specify the text encoding
9334
9335       -endian <type>
9336              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
9337
9338       -fill <color>
9339              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
9340
9341       -filter <type>
9342              use this type of filter when resizing an image
9343
9344       -font <name>
9345              use this font when annotating the image with text
9346
9347       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
9348              surround the image with an ornamental border
9349
9350       -gamma <value>
9351              level of gamma correction
9352
9353       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
9354              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
9355
9356       -gravity <type>
9357              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
9358
9359       -green-primary <x>,<y>
9360              green chromaticity primary point
9361
9362       -help  print usage instructions
9363
9364       -interlace <type>
9365              the type of interlacing scheme
9366
9367       -label <name>
9368              assign a label to an image
9369
9370       -limit <type> <value>
9371              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
9372              resource limit
9373
9374       -log <string>
9375              Specify format for debug log
9376
9377       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
9378
9379       -mattecolor <color>
9380              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
9381
9382       -mode <value>
9383              mode of operation
9384
9385       -monitor
9386              show progress indication
9387
9388       -monochrome
9389              transform the image to black and white
9390
9391       -noop  NOOP (no option)
9392
9393       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9394              size and location of an image canvas
9395
9396       -pen <color>
9397              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9398
9399       -pointsize <value>
9400              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9401
9402       -quality <value>
9403              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9404
9405       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9406              red chromaticity primary point
9407
9408       -render
9409              render vector operations
9410
9411       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9412              Adjust image page offsets
9413
9414       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9415              resize an image
9416
9417       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9418              rotate the image
9419
9420       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9421              chroma subsampling factors
9422
9423       -scenes <value-value>
9424              range of image scene numbers to read
9425
9426       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
9427              shadow the montage
9428
9429       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9430              sharpen the image
9431
9432       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9433              width and height of the image
9434
9435       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9436
9437       -stroke <color>
9438              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9439
9440       -strokewidth <value>
9441              set the stroke width
9442
9443       -texture <filename>
9444              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9445
9446       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9447              resize an image (quickly)
9448
9449       -tile <geometry>
9450              layout of images [montage]
9451
9452       -title <string>
9453              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
9454
9455       -transform
9456              transform the image
9457
9458       -transparent <color>
9459              make this color transparent within the image
9460
9461       -treedepth <value>
9462              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9463
9464       -trim  trim an image
9465
9466       -type <type>
9467              the image type
9468
9469       -verbose
9470              print detailed information about the image
9471
9472       -version
9473              print GraphicsMagick version string
9474
9475       -white-point <x>,<y>
9476              chromaticity white point
9477
9478              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
9479              above.
9480
9481

X RESOURCES

9483       Montage  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
9484       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
9485       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
9486
9487       All  montage options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, mon‐
9488       tage uses the following X resources:
9489
9490       background (class Background)
9491              background color
9492
9493              Specifies the preferred color to use  for  the  composite  image
9494              background.  The default is #ccc.
9495
9496       borderColor (class BorderColor)
9497              border color
9498
9499              Specifies  the  preferred  color  to use for the composite image
9500              border. The default is #ccc.
9501
9502       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
9503              border width
9504
9505              Specifies the width in pixels of the composite image border. The
9506              default is 2.
9507
9508       font (class Font)
9509              font to use
9510
9511              Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use when displaying
9512              text within the composite image. The default is 9x15, fixed,  or
9513              5x8 determined by the composite image size.
9514
9515       matteColor (class MatteColor)
9516              color of the frame
9517
9518              Specify  the color of an image frame. A 3D effect is achieved by
9519              using highlight and shadow colors derived from this  color.  The
9520              default value is #697B8F.
9521
9522       pen (class Pen)
9523              text color
9524
9525              Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the compos‐
9526              ite image.  The default is black.
9527
9528       title (class Title)
9529              composite image title
9530
9531              This resource specifies the title to be placed at the top of the
9532              composite  image. The default is not to place a title at the top
9533              of the composite image.
9534

GM TIME

DESCRIPTION

9537       time executes an  arbitrary  gm  utility  command  (e.g.  convert)  and
9538       reports  the  user and elapsed time.  This provides way to measure com‐
9539       mand execution times similar to the Unix ´time' command but in a porta‐
9540       ble and consistent way.
9541

EXAMPLES

9543       To obtain time information for the execution of a command:
9544
9545       %  gm time convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm convert input.ppm
9546       -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm    22.60s user 0.00s system  2354%  cpu  0.960
9547       total
9548
9549       Here is the interpretation of the above output:
9550
9551           user - the total user time consumed.
9552           system - the total system time consumed.
9553           total - the total elapsed time consumed.
9554
9555

OPTIONS

9557       The  time  command reqires no options other than the gm command to exe‐
9558       cute.
9559

GM VERSION

DESCRIPTION

9562       version displays the software release  version,  build  quantum  (pixel
9563       sample)  depth,  web  site URL, copyright notice, enabled features sup‐
9564       port, configuration parameters, and final build options used  to  build
9565       the  software.   The  available information depends on how the software
9566       was configured and the host system.
9567

EXAMPLES

9569       To display the version information:
9570
9571         GraphicsMagick 1.3.27a 2017-12-11 Q16 http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/
9572         Copyright (C) 2002-2017 GraphicsMagick Group.
9573         Additional copyrights and licenses apply to this software.
9574         See http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/www/Copyright.html for details.
9575         Feature Support:
9576           Native Thread Safe       yes
9577           Large Files (> 32 bit)   yes
9578           Large Memory (> 32 bit)  yes
9579           BZIP                     yes
9580           DPS                      no
9581           FlashPix                 no
9582           FreeType                 yes
9583           Ghostscript (Library)    no
9584           JBIG                     yes
9585           JPEG-2000                yes
9586           JPEG                     yes
9587           Little CMS               yes
9588           Loadable Modules         no
9589           OpenMP                   yes (201307)
9590           PNG                      yes
9591           TIFF                     yes
9592           TRIO                     no
9593           UMEM                     no
9594           WebP                     yes
9595           WMF                      yes
9596           X11                      yes
9597           XML                      yes
9598           ZLIB                     yes
9599         Host type: x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
9600         Configured using the command:
9601           ./configure  ...
9602         Final Build Parameters:
9603           CC       = ...
9604           CFLAGS   = ...
9605           CPPFLAGS = ...
9606           CXX      = ...
9607           CXXFLAGS = ...
9608           LDFLAGS  = ...
9609           LIBS     = ...
9610
9611

OPTIONS

9613       The version command does not currently support any options.
9614
9615
9616
9617GraphicsMagick                    2019/07/12                             gm(1)
Impressum